Link to top Back of the Envelope

Blog
Writings About Me Photos
Links

Saturday, May 30, 2009

The History of the Domini: Part VI
The Rest of the Story: The rest of The History of the Domini can be found here.

This is the first chapter of the second half of Randall Aurelius's History of the Domini. While the first half discusses the origins of the Domini, and their part in the great war to free humanity from enslavement, the second half discusses what happened once humanity was free. The Domini's role in shaping the world is often forgotten, but it was much larger than is usually acknowledged.


The History of the Domini
by Randall Aurelius


Part VI: The Schism

With the Malwer imprisoned and the Amaranthine isolated, the humans began to make a life for themselves, and the Shades tried to find their place among them. There was little agreement among the Shades, and they quickly split into dozens of sects, maybe hundreds, each with its own objectives.

Some of the Shades thought that our main duty was to guard the imprisoned Malwer. They built a fortress named Overwatch near the prison, and called themselves the Watchers. They led an aesthetic life, isolated from the rest of humankind, using magic to make themselves self-sufficient. Others followed their path, seeking isolation and self-sufficiency, even if they refused the burden of the Watchers. These were among the most successful in finding a quiet life, but most of them died out within a generation. They had no means to reproduce, and most did not attempt to recruit. The Watchers were the longest lasting of these groups, since many Shades recruited and trained by the other sects were attracted by their sense of calling, and most of the sects would allow their members to make the pilgrimage to Overwatch and join them.

Others attempted to give up the black robe. It became apparent rather quickly that the mundanes, as we called humans without the magic, would not accept us into their fold. Any man who was known to have been a Shade found hatred and intolerance, and many were driven out of their communities or killed. Only those who hid their history could survive, but it is believed that many did successfully integrate themselves with mundane society, living and dying among them.

There were others who sought a middle ground, who tried to live apart from mundanes, yet not be entirely isolated. They recruited as they had before, taking young men secretly and without warning, so they could be trained in the magic. Occasionally, they traded with the mundanes, although this was difficult given how little they were trusted. Thus, they too had to seek self-sufficiency. But because they still recruited, they were able to survive while the completely isolated sects died out.

The last and worst were those who thought we should rightfully rule over the mundanes, using our magic to seek power over them. These groups would make themselves into a ruling class, recruiting others with magical ability and, by sharing power with them, perpetuate their power. But those seeking power are not easily appeased, and what one man can take another will covet. These groups went to war with each other and with the less aggressive sects, again and again, raising armies and wielding magic as a weapon. The Shade Wars lasted centuries, and by the end of it, only two groups were standing: the Domini and the Necromancers.


This has been the latest 549 words of a 3,393 word story in progress.

Tuesday, November 11, 2008

Crossing Over: Part VII
The Rest of the Story: Read it here.

This is the final part of my College Roomies from Hell fanfiction. I thought I better get this up before I posted the storyblogging carnival. Speaking of which, I'll have it up tomorrow.


Chapter 7

"So…" Mark said. "You have laservision."

Dave was watching Wendy and Stella set up the pentagram. Rose, with Fluffy on her arm, was overseeing them to make sure they got it right. Dave just hoped that rock knew what it was doing. When Mark spoke, he looked at him, then very carefully took a step away. He looked envious, and that made Dave nervous. "Yeah. Like I said, I swam in a polluted lake and mutated."

"But why didn't that happen here? None of us are mutated." He sounded positively disappointed.

"I don't know why Dahlia and the others didn't do the same thing. Maybe because girls aren't as likely to get so drunk they hijack a plane and make a porno movie before waking up in a tree about to be cut down by a lumberjack."

"Wow, that sounds like it was quite an adventure. So, um, where is this lake?"

"Trust me, stay away from there. I was lucky: my mutation isn't disfiguring. Mike and Roger weren't. Mike's left arm turned into a tentacle and Roger grew an eye in his hand. There's no telling what mutation you'd end up with if you went there. "

"Aww. Okay, then tell me why you didn't use your laservision on me when I was beating you up. You could have taken me down anytime, couldn't you?"

Dave rolled his shoulders uncomfortably, only to gasp in pain. He reached up to massage his aching shoulder, which gave him time to think. The truth was that he had been giving voice to his frustrations, and laservision would have ended the fight before he could do so. "I, uh, didn't want to hurt you," he said instead.

"And here I was, worried about hurting you." Mark paused before continuing. "So I guess this is why you're so convinced that you and the others are supposed to help this female version of me. You think that the mutations were given to you for that reason."

"It's occurred to me, yes," Dave said.

"But here, Dahlia doesn't have a mutation. How is she supposed to help me?"

Dave shook his head. "It's not about the mutations. They give us an edge in the fights, but I don't think it's about the fights either. Satan wants our souls, and in order to do that, he needs to corrupt us. Individually we're doomed, but if we help one another, we have a chance."

"Heh, you sound like that friend of yours, Rikki."

"Yeah, he's the one who gave me the idea… oh no, now what?"

Stella and Wendy had gotten into a fight, and Rose and Adam were trying to drag them apart. Marvin came over to help, leaving Michelle idly filing her nails, and pried Stella's hair out of Wendy's grip. "You're such an idiot, Wendy!" Stella shouted. "It's no wonder Satan chose me as his bride."

"No way! He chose me!" Wendy said, managing to grab hold of Stella's dress despite Rose's, Adam's, and Marvin's attempts to separate them. Stella was trying to claw her eyes out when a blaze of blue light set the air sizzling and they both froze instantly.

"Frankly, I don't care if Satan marries you both," Dave said, relieved that Wendy had released her grip on Stella's bodice. The fabric had seemed close to tearing, and that was the last thing he wanted to see. "He can have a family, raise a couple of little demons. Maybe it'll get him off our backs. I do care about getting home, though, so can't this wait until after I get there."

"That's the problem. That idiot"—Stella pointed at her roommate—"thinks the last three candles should be black, red, red, but I know they should be red, black, red."

"Oh, sure, if you want to turn him inside out," Wendy said. "If you want something less dis-organ-ized, you should do it my way."

Everything took on a blue tinge as Dave briefly entertained the thought of putting them both out of his misery. Unfortunately, he needed their help. "Rose, what does Fluffy say?" Dave asked.

"Fluffy's not sure," Rose answered. "The books they're using argue as much as they do."

"Argh, just when I could use advice from a rock. Okay, we'll do it Stev-Stella's way."

"Are you sure?" Mark asked. "If Wendy's right, it might kill you."

"If they're anything like Steve and Waldo, then Stella's less of an idiot. Besides, if it turns me inside out, they know you'll kill them. I think they have plenty of incentive to make sure it works."

The two witches looked at each other, then back at him. "Well, what are you waiting for?" Mark said.

Rose, Marvin, and Adam released the two of them, they scrambled to get to work, Stella putting the last few candles in place while Wendy used chalk to draw one last symbol on the wooden floor. When they were done, Stella said, "Okay, it's ready. Should we do it now?"

Dave took a couple of deep breaths as he gathered up Chester. If it kills me—then at least those two will be right behind. "Okay, we should do this now before my courage gives out."



"Dahlia" sighed, then closed her eyes as she lifted the glass to her lips.

"Stop!"

Everyone froze, including girl-Dave, who held the glass less than an inch from her mouth. With so many people packed into the kitchen, all their eyes focused on "Dahlia," no one had noticed that someone else had crowded into the doorway, his discolored and puffy face peering over Marsha's shoulder. Complete silence fell over the room as he entered, limping, until Margaret said, "Dave?"

"Yeah, it's me," he said, crossing the room to where Dahlia—Margaret guessed that really was her name—stood. A black cat, obviously Chester, followed after him. Dahlia continued to stand still, the glass trembling against the edge of her lip as her eyes darted around the room, until Dave took the potion out of her hand and placed it on the counter. "And you're Dahlia, aren't you? I'm thinking you really don't want to drink that."

"Then I-I'm not Dave? They said I was…"

"No, you're not Dave. I am," he answered.

"Then I am useless," she said, and started to cry.

"Whoa, wait," Dave said, hands raised helplessly. "Who said that?"

She pointed a shaky finger at Mike as she wiped at her eyes with the other hand, saying, "He did."

Mike seemed to shrink under the withering looks the others gave him. Well, probably it was only Marsha's venomous gaze that caused that. "In my defense, I thought she was you," he argued.

Dave's eyes flashed blue and Mike raised a tentacle to shield his eyes, but there was no brilliant blaze of light this time. "You know, Mike, I ought to blast you on general principle, but…" He looked back at Dahlia. "C'mere," he said, pulling her into an awkward hug. He wasn't much better at the comforting stuff than Margaret. "You're not useless, Dahlia. You're just out-of-place. They need you back home just as much as these guys need me." He looked over her shoulder at Mike and the others, as if wanting to see whether anyone would challenge him. No one did.

"But how do I get home?" Dahlia asked. "Where am I?"

"Isn't it obvious?" asked April. "I bet she's from an alternate universe."

"That's the craziest thing—" Mike began.

"April's right," Dave said before Mike could start an argument. He let go of Dahlia so he could talk to the others. "Steve's and Waldo's spell worked right the first time, sending me to Dahlia's world. If they re-cast the spell, we can send Dahlia home."

"Does this mean we spent all that time on that potion for nothing?" Steve asked.

"If you don't want it to go to waste, you can try it," Margaret said.

"Uh, that's all right. I'll just go get started on that pentagram." He hurriedly left the room, Waldo trailing in his wake, leaving the kitchen just a hair less crowded.

Chester had joined Chelsea on the counter, and the two cats were sniffing at each other. Dave hastily seized hold of his cat, and Dahlia grabbed hers, both of them blushing furiously as they did so. The others wisely didn't ask any questions.

"So, Dave, what happened to you?" Margaret asked. "You look like you've been in a fight with a werecoy—werewolf, a fight with a werewolf." She carefully avoided looking at Roger, who was holding a furious whispered conversation with Fluffy and didn't seem to have heard.

He said, "I'll explain after we get Dahlia home."

"But I still don't understand," Dahlia said. "What do you mean about an alternate universe and another world?"

Dave did his best to explain the concept, which was a neat trick considering he just barely understood it. April joined in, as a result of which he understood even less.

"So events happen in parallel in both worlds?" Margaret asked, worried.

"Not completely parallel," Dave said, gesturing significantly to his bruised face. "Although apparently both worlds are out to get me."

"Well, obviously!" Roger said loudly. When he noticed that everyone had turned towards him, he said, "Um, sorry, what did you say, Dave? Fluffy was just pointing out that the events of the two universes aren't identical, but they do converge for significant events, then they diverge along different paths only to converge again at the next significant event."

"I find it odd that the mutations aren't considered a significant event," Margaret said.

"Fluffy agrees, but it doesn't have an explanation," Roger replied.

"What did happen there, Dave?" Dahlia asked him. "You look like you got into a fight."

Dave sighed. "I guess you're going to find out anyway. Mark and I had a disagreement."

"Mark did that?" Dahlia asked, horrified. "But why? I know he has a temper, but…"

"I hit him first, actually," Dave said, looking down at Chester, resting in his arms, rather than meeting Dahlia's eyes. "Uh-oh, I think I hear Steve and Waldo arguing. I better go make sure they get it right." He hurried out the door before Dahlia or Margaret could say anything else. Margaret hadn't heard anything from the wonder morons. She and Dahlia met each other's eyes, and they both shrugged.

"Don't worry about it, Dahlia," Mike said. "Dave can't cross the street without getting pounded by somebody. Something about him just screams 'Hurt me!'"

"And you're always happy to oblige, aren't you, Mike?" Margaret snapped.

"Hey, he expects it from me. Better me than someone who would really hurt him." Mike arched an eyebrow at her. It was an impressive feat, and Margaret would have appreciated it more if she hadn't understood perfectly well what he was implying.

Rather than respond to Mike's goading, Margaret headed out into the living room, where Dave was arguing with Steve. The others followed. Unlike the living rooms upstairs, this one had a wood floor, more amenable to chalk drawings than a carpet, at least. A pentagram was drawn on it, surrounded by all sorts of symbols, bearing a resemblance to letters but each from a different alphabet: Arabic, Chinese, Hebrew, even what looked like an English "W." There was plenty of room for it, as the living room was even more sparsely furnished than the guys' apartment, lacking not just a television but even a couch, although there were plenty of bookshelves laden with old leatherbound books with unreadable languages printed on their spine, along with more modern volumes such as Demon Summoning for Dummies and A Beginner's Guide to Sumerian Chants. None of the room's current occupants had much interest in those books, as Steve and Dave stood on opposite sides of the pentagram, glaring at each other, while Waldo was scribbling more symbols on the floor with chalk while trying to stay below eye-level.

"I know what I'm doing," Steve was saying. "I had no trouble sending you there, did I?"

"But I'm telling you that in the other universe the candles went red, black, red," Dave said.

"That was there," Steve answered. "Here they go black, red, black. Are you going to trust me or not?"

"I'm not going to trust you, that's for sure. If something goes wrong, I'm going to give you a terminal case of laserburn."

"Nothing will go wrong, I'm sure," Steve said. "So…, um, how can you tell whether it actually sent her back to the right place?"

"Because if she doesn't arrive home within an hour from the time I left, they're going to send Mark after her, and you know that their spell works. If it turns out you lost her, he's going to be furious. He did this"—Dave pointed to his face—"out of mild annoyance."

"Oookay," Steve said, backing away a step, "you've answered all my questions. Do you have any questions, Waldo?"

"None at all. You beat me to the punch."

"I guess we're ready then."

"Dahlia," Dave said. "It's time to go."

"Are you sure it's safe?" she asked as she sat down in the center of the pentagram, Chelsea in her lap.

"No, not really," Dave said, looking at his feet. "But Wendy and Stella were able to send me here, so Steve and Waldo should be able to send you to your home."

Dahlia turned very pale, but all she said was, "Let's hurry up and do this. Thanks, Dave."

"Just trust me when I say they really do need you there," Dave answered.

Dahlia nodded. "And thank you, Margaret, for listening to me."

"Yeah, sure," Margaret replied.

Steve and Waldo took positions on either side of the pentagram and began to chant. It was, as far as Margaret could tell, a very poor job of it. She wasn't sure what language they were chanting in, but quite a few words came out garbled, quite often they seemed to be saying very different things, and once she distinctly heard Steve slip the phrase "Dave is a jerkwad" into the mumbling. Despite this worrying fact, Dave didn't show any reaction to their poor chanting. On the other hand, he had a distinctly greenish cast throughout, even showing through the bruises, so maybe he was too worried to notice. Dahlia looked almost identical, sitting there with her eyes tightly shut. Finally the chanting came to a crescendo and suddenly halted. The eerie silence in the aftermath stretched on for a few seconds, then a minute, then two.

"Is something going to hap—" Margaret began.

"Shhh," hissed Dave.

She was going to argue, but at that moment she notice that Dahlia had grown dim and dingy. She looked more closely to try to see what was happening to her, and realized that Dahlia was surrounded by a black mist, the same darkness that had formed around Dave before. It grew darker and deeper until it was quite opaque, blocking her sight of Dahlia underneath a dome tied to the outer circle of the pentogram. And then it vanished, and Dahlia was gone too.

"Did it work?" she asked.

"I think so," Dave replied. "Even though their chanting sounded terrible."

"It doesn't really matter what they chant," Roger replied. "As long as they have the rhythm and volume right. That's what Fluffy says, anyway."

"Do you think we'll ever find out if she made it home?" Marsha asked from where she had been watching, well away from the pentagram.

"I don't know," Mike told her. "Probably not. Well, who wants pizza?"

"I do," said Roger. "Can we get anchovies and peaches?"

"Heh. I thought you'd want gravel again," Mike said as he headed out the door.

"That's Fluffy's favorite, not mine, and he's not hungry right now."

"As long as it doesn't have mushrooms I'm happy," said April as she followed Roger into the hallway. "Every time I see a mushroom I can't help looking for a blue tinge."

"Dave, are you all right?" Margaret asked him, as he had remained where he was. Waldo and Steve seemed eager to be rid of them, but reluctant to say so considering who they were talking to.

"I suppose. I… learned something about myself, and my feelings, over there. I'm not sure I liked it, but I'm glad it happened."

Margaret nodded, "I know what you mean."

"Really? What did you learn?"

"You know, feelings and such."

"And here I thought guys were supposed to be the ones who didn't like talking about their feelings," Dave said as he turned towards the door.

"Well, was guy-me any better at it?" Margaret asked, joining him.

"Not exactly," Dave said. "I pretty much had to beat it out of him."

"Oh, really?" she said, trying Mike's one eyebrow trick and only managing to lift both.

"Well, okay, so he did most of the beating, but he was honest, to me and to himself. I think he was, anyway. He had an easier time talking to me than to Dahlia."

"Yeah, that's the impression I got from her, too. Why is it so much harder to communicate when it's a man and a woman?"

"Dunno," Dave replied as he pushed the button for the elevator. It dinged and opened right away. The others seemed to have taken the stairs, but Margaret got on the elevator with Dave, even though it was only one floor. Dave didn't look like he was in any condition to climb even that far. In fact, he looked as if even holding Chester in his arms was painful.

"Here, give him to me," Margaret said, pulling Chester from him.

"Wha—really? I thought you were, you know…"

"I don't mind holding him just so long as he behaves," she said, cradling the cat against her stomach. Chester snuggled against her but otherwise kept still. A rumbling purr started up almost immediately.

Dave was fighting a losing battle to keep a dopey grin off of his face. With the condition his face was in, it looked like that grin hurt. "He's very happy," Dave blurted by way of explanation. He cleared his throat and changed the subject, "Anyway, with Mark, I could say what I felt, I could be honest. I wish I could do that with you."

"Well, why don't you?" she asked.

"Eh, maybe we can wait for my injuries to heal first."

Margaret rolled her eyes, but otherwise kept her thoughts to herself. She was good at that. Besides, she had forgotten how warm and soft Chester was, and she was enjoying just holding him.

The End


This is the last 3,111 word excerpt of a 17,473 word short story.

Wednesday, October 8, 2008

Crossing Over: Part VI
The Rest of the Story: You can find it here.

I've been neglectful in getting this story posted, and in getting the Storyblogging Carnival done. I'll get both of them done tonight.

This is the next to last part of my College Roomies from Hell!!! fanfiction (posted with permission. It's almost over, but I'm not going to make it easy.


Crossing Over
Part VI

Margaret held "Dahlia" while she cried. Her head was slumped on Margaret's chest while her hands clutched the short sleeves of her "Die!" tee shirt. Her sobs had finally trailed off into whimpers, but it didn't seem like she would be done any time soon. Margaret awkwardly patted her back, at a loss for what to say. She'd already done "There, there" and shushing sounds, and that had exhausted her repertoire for handling these sorts of situations. In retrospect, it probably was not a good idea to get the female Dave to talk about "Mark."

Girl-Dave had denied that Mark had hit her, although Margaret wasn't all that certain she believed her. But if she remembered that happening, that wasn't what she had wanted to talk about. Instead she had spoke of his rudeness, his attempts to distance himself and drive her off, how he always blamed himself for anything bad that happened to her. The description was all too familiar, but hearing this account of "Mark" from this feminine Dave gave her a new insight into it. She found herself becoming angry on "Dahlia's" behalf, and if she could have, she'd have given this Mark the beating of a lifetime. No matter how justified he was in his concern, he had hurt Dahlia badly. Unfortunately, she was Mark, and self-flagellation would not help matters in the least. At the same time, she cursed "Dahlia" for giving her such a clear idea of what it had been like to be on the receiving end of her wrath. Dave had never done so. Although he'd communicated his concern and his love until she was sick of hearing of it, he always whitewashed the anger and frustration he'd felt, always ready to forgive or worse, excuse, her actions. If she hurt him, and she had, he would act depressed and distant for a while, but he'd keep coming back without letting her know how she'd hurt him or why he'd return despite that. "Dahlia" had no such reluctance in discussing her feelings with Margaret. Margaret really wished she did.

She realized that "Dahlia's" whimpers had ceased, and that only slow breathing came from her now. She'd fallen asleep. Margaret gently disengaged her hands from her tee shirt and then removed herself, laying the girl-Dave down on the couch. She found the blanket the girls used when they slept there and draped it over her, then took the half-full water glass to the sink and began washing it out. When the phone sounded, she picked it up on the first ring. "Dahlia" stirred in response, but didn't awake. Chelsea, who'd taken refuge under the couch during the storm of weeping, looked up from where she lay on the couch near her owner's feet, but otherwise didn't move.

"Hello," Margaret said.

"Hello, Margaret?" said Roger. "We think we have an answer to our Dahlia problem."

"No, no, no, you idiots!" A voice yelled in the background. "A cat's eye marble is not an acceptable substitute for an actual cat's eye. I told you to use three newts' eyes—the book says that'd be fine!" That sounded like Marsha.

"If the solution involves Marsha cooking, I'm not interested," Margaret said.

"No, no, she's not cooking, just supervising, and Mike's making sure everything's going right. See, there's this potion…"

"A potion?"

"Yeah, it's supposed to change a person's gender. If 'Dahlia' drinks it, she should turn back to Dave."

"I thought we were just going to try to reverse the spell," Margaret said. "I'm not sure about messing with potions."

"Well, we've researched it and we don't think there's a way to just reverse the spell. Transforming Dave seems to have been a random misfire, and there's no way to duplicate the effect. This should work, though. Fluffy says so."

"Fluffy?"

"Yeah, I went and got it when Mike and Marsha showed up. It's been a big help."

"I'm sure it has. So if this potion changes Dave back into a guy, will it fix his memories too?"

"We think so."

"Think?" Margaret asked, disliking this more and more.

"Well, there's no way to know for sure, as we don't know what changed his memories, but it could just be the trauma of being transformed screwing with his mind. I've read about cases like this. Changing him back should be just like hitting an amnesiac over the head again."

"Does that actually work?"

"It does on TV. You should always believe what you see on TV, Margaret."

This is sounding crazier and crazier, but Roger's usually right about the crazy stuff, Margaret thought. "Okay, I'll bring him down. When will this potion be done?"

"It's almost done now, and you need to hurry. It loses its potency within half an hour."

Margaret hung up, then walked over to girl-Dave and gently shook her shoulder. "C'mon, Dave, Dahlia, whoever. Time to get up. We've found a solution."



Dave groaned as he came awake, a hand shaking his shoulder. "Ouch, that hurts. What happened?" he asked.

"You passed out," someone said. It sounded like Mark, but he still couldn't see anything. Were his eyes shut? "I'm sorry I hurt you, but you wouldn't stop."

"Yeah, I'm like that," Dave said. A cold weight was over his eyes, he realized, and he reached up to pull the damp washcloth away. Now he could see a blurry shape in front of him. He blinked, and he thought it became less blurry, but he could still see nothing distinct. He focused on what he could feel. It felt like he was reclining on the couch, sitting up with a pillow beneath his back. He ached all over, but that shouldn't surprise him. "I don't suppose I convinced you of anything?"

"You convinced me that you're even more stubborn than I thought. And you're a better fighter than I expected."

Dave shook his head, and discovered that he could make out Mark's face now. Not well—as blurry as his vision was, it looked no different from Margaret's—but at least he could separate it from the background. "Think about what's happened over the past couple of months. I doubt it happened the same way for you guys as it did for me, but I'm betting it was close. Think of the fights and arguments between the six of you, driving you apart, causing you to run off. Rose, too. You blamed Satan for all of it, and I think you're at least partly right. But what was his goal?"

"He wanted to get to me through my friends…"

"Or maybe he wanted to separate you from your friends. I think it was divide and conquer. Get each of us alone and vulnerable and use that to break us. He came close with me: that false angel almost took away what little hope I had. And Mike—well, that's another story."

"False angel?" Dave started to say something but Mark interrupted, "No, it's not important. It's all my fault, anyway."

Dave continued, "You aren't listening. It's not just you, it's all of us. Alone we're prey, maybe even tools he can use, but together we're a threat somehow. No, I don't know how, but that's what I think. If any of us runs off, he only makes himself vulnerable and the rest of us weaker."

"You really believe this, don’t you?" Mark asked.

Dave sighed, "Yeah. For all the good it does. You'll go on blaming yourself for everything no matter what."

"Well, we'll worry about that later. We need to get going."

"Huh, why?" Dave asked, but he was already swinging his feet off the couch and levering himself up. He winced at the pain, and even the wincing hurt.

Mark helped him to his feet while Dave tried to force his legs to obey. "Rose thinks she and the witches have found a way to fix your problem," Mark said. "For what it's worth, she says Fluffy agrees."

"Uh-huh. And would this solution involve turning me into a girl?" Dave asked.

"Well, yeah," Mark admitted.

"And what if I don't want to be one?"

"Look, I told you before, it's just that your memories are all screwed up. You liked being a woman."

"Even if my memories are mixed up, what I remember is being a guy. Why would I want to be a girl?"

"But once you're changed back, your memories will be fixed, too. At least that's what Rose thinks."

"And if they aren't? Then I'll just be a guy in a girl's body." Dave sighed. "I'm almost afraid to go down there, but we better get this straightened out now. Come on."

Dave limped into the hallway, refusing to lean on Mark. Any more than he had to, anyway. Chester followed behind, thankfully sensing that hitching a ride on Dave's chest might cause his soul-mate to topple over. I should have known better than to pick a fight with a male Margaret. I'm going to be aching for a month. Oddly, though, I do feel better. I guess I needed to get that out of my system. I wonder if I got through to him. He glanced at Mark, who looked concerned and guilty, though he tried to hide it. Ugh! He still thinks I'm Dahlia. Hopefully, I'll be able to disabuse him of that. They took the elevator rather than attempting to navigate the stairs, for which Dave was grateful, as his body didn't seem ready for anything more strenuous than a walk down the hallway.

They found the door to Steve's and Waldo's—no, make that Stella's and Wendy's—apartment ajar, a strange odor wafting out. Mark pushed the door wide, and Dave limped into the crowded apartment. Adam, Michelle, and Marvin were in the dining room, although Adam and Michelle were on opposite sides of the room. Through the open door to the kitchen, Dave could see three women he had never met but whom he recognized instantly. The girl with stiff, curly blond hair, glasses, and Fluffy in her arm had to be Rose, and her tee shirt saying "Queen of the Moon People" merely confirmed that. Stella and Wendy looked way too much like Steve and Waldo in dresses for Dave's comfort. They were huddled over the stove, ladling a purple liquid bubbling in the pot on the stove into a glass with Tweetey and Sylvester on it.

Adam was the first to see them enter, and his smile dropped away the moment he saw Dave's condition. "Good God, Dahlia!" he exclaimed. "What happened to you?"

"Look, I'm not Dahlia. I wish you guys would believe me. And until we get that sorted out, I'd rather not say what happened. But first, I want to know what Wendy and Stella are up to."

"We finished the potion that will change you back," said the female-Steve. "Although I think you ought to stay this way. You're much better looking," she said with a most unladylike leer.

"I agree," Dave said, and lasered the glass out of her hand, sending it crashing into the wall where it promptly shattered and sent its contents splashing over the wall and countertop. Several people screamed, but Dave couldn't tell who as Mark's startled jump had removed a vital support and he'd fallen to the floor.

"What the Hell was that?" Mark yelled at Dave as he levered himself off the floor yet again. The others were staring at him, and while there were murmurs between them, no one besides Mark spoke to Dave himself.

"That was my laservision," Dave said, as he regained his feet. "And have you noticed that I seem to be spending an unusual amount of time on the floor today? Even for me? I swear it's like gravity has it in for me or something." He wobbled but his legs seemed steady enough to keep him upright. Mark didn't offer to support him this time.

"When did that witch get laservision?" Stella asked.

"Yeah, that potion's supposed to be simmered, not microwaved," Wendy asserted.

Everyone else was staring at him like he might blast them at any moment. Even Mark seemed scared, in that about-to-go-for-his-guns way. Dave smiled, and he imagined that as bruised and puffy as his face was right now, it probably looked grotesque, maybe even threatening. He hoped so. "Mike, Roger, and I got really drunk after I made one of my stupid attempts to get Margaret to love me. We ended up swimming in a toxic pool, and we mutated. I got laservision."

He looked around, wondering whether anyone believed him. None of them seemed willing to be the first to speak. "Now do you believe me? I'm not Dahlia. And you are not my friends. Or my enemies." His eyes glowed briefly as he shot a look at Wendy and Stella, and they both took a step back. "I don't know what's going on any more than you do, but if Rose is anything like Roger, I suspect she does. Or at least that rock does." Rose looked scared and... Uh oh, Dave recognized that look. "Don't ruin your tee shirt on my account, Rose. I'm not going to hurt anyone, and besides, laservision beats werecoyote every time. Trust me, I know."

"Well, okay," Rose said, "I'll ask Fluffy." She whispered something to the rock, and soon they were engaged in a heated, if half-silent and half-whispered, debate. Dave only caught a few words, like "wormhole" and "quantum mechanics." After a while, Rose looked up from her rock and said, "Fluffy's just as confused about the whole laservision thing as I am, but it suggests that maybe Wendy's and Stella's spell actually worked."

"Huh?" Dave asked. "What do you mean?"

"Well, the spell wasn't supposed to change you—or Dahlia, if you aren't her—into a guy. It was supposed to send you to another plane of existence."

"You mean like an alternate dimension?" Adam asked. "Where everything's really similar to here but with slight differences?"

"Hmph. Since when did you become an expert on other planes of existence?" Michelle said.

"Since I read webcomics. Traveling to alternate dimensions happens all the time in them, like the Dimension of Portuguese in Sluggy. All the same people are in both dimensions, but they're different in small ways, like they speak Portuguese instead of English."

"Yes, that's exactly what Fluffy says," Rose answered. "Only in this dimension, everyone's the opposite gender. Other than that, events are mostly parallel, so that when Wendy and Stella were sending Dahlia to that dimension, their counterparts were sending Dave here."

"It makes more sense than most of Roger's theories," Dave said. "So how do we fix it?"

"I think," Rose replied, "that if Wendy and Stella just cast their spell again, it'll send Dave to wherever they sent Dahlia. Assuming that Dave and Dahlia just switched places, then that should put him back where he belongs. If everyone on the other side is doing the same thing, then they should be sending Dahlia back at the same time."

"Only it's never that easy in the webcomics," Adam said. "If there were more than two dimensions involved in the exchange, or if events don't exactly parallel—and they don't, not unless Dahlia has laservision and you and Michelle are mutants too—then things could get messy."



"Just drink it already," Margaret said. Her impatience was making her angry.

"It smells funny," the girl-Dave said, making a face as she peered into the glass full of the ugly purple liquid. She'd been doing that for over a quarter of an hour now. Everyone was crowded into Steve's and Waldo's little kitchen, waiting on her to decide whether to drink the potion. Margaret had tried her best to convince her to, and sometimes Mike and Marsha had joined in, but Roger and April had been mostly silent. So had Chelsea, who sat on the countertop and refused to go anywhere near the potion. Margaret was getting worried. If "Dahlia" wouldn't drink this stupid potion, then she'd—they would never get Dave back.

"Then hold your nose when you drink it," Margaret advised.

"But I don't want to be a boy," she whined, apparently giving up on excuses.

Waldo guffawed at that, and Steve said, "Hey, if she wants to be a girl, I don't see why we should be forcing her—"

"As if I can't see you staring at her breasts, Steve. And for the last time, Dave, you are a boy whether or not you look like one right now," Margaret said. "You're just messed up. If we don't fix it, there'll be a whole rash of problems that will come from it."

"Margaret's right," Mike said, gesturing with his tentacle. "Dahlia's" fearful eyes locked onto Mike's mutated appendage and tracked it, as they always did when she let herself look at Mike. Usually she did her best not to. "We need the Dave that's not afraid of our mutations. Whose laservision can make short work of jokers like these two. We don't need a scared little girl."

"You… you think I'm useless?" girl-Dave asked.

"Dave isn't," Mike said.

"If she's going to drink it, she better hurry," Roger said. "It loses its potency soon."

There was silence for several long minutes. "I want to be this hero you've all been talking about, but I'm afraid," she said.

"It's your choice," Margaret said. "But we need Dave."

"Dahlia" sighed, then closed her eyes as she lifted the glass to her lips.


This is a 2,926 word excerpt of a 17,473 word story rated PG-13.

Tuesday, September 9, 2008

Crossing Over: Part V
The Rest of the Story: The entire story can be found here.

This is awfully late for the Storyblogging Carnival, which should be going up soon (probably today). My excuse for both is that I've been busy. Hopefully I'll have enough time today to catch up.

This chapter contains the one scene that I wrote this story for. When I first imagined what would happen in the circumstances I describe, I really wanted to see how it play out. It seemed unlikely that the comic would explore this on its own, so I decided to write the scene myself. I think it worked well.

Once again, this is my one and only fanfiction. The characters, world, and events referenced belong to Maritza Campos of College Roomies from Hell!!!. Only the particular events described here are my own.


Chapter 5

"But-but—" Dave tried unsuccessfully to get a word in edgewise.

"Can I come?" Marvin asked.

"Sure," Michelle replied. "You can be the good cop."

"Aw, man! I wanted to be the bad cop." It occurred to Dave that those disturbing comments that were somehow cute coming from Marsha were really creepy when Marvin said them. The "sexy stalker" just did not work when the roles were reversed.

"Hmm, maybe we should do bad cop/worse cop," Michelle said, as she and Marvin headed down the hall, Marvin's hand at the small of her back.

"I'm not Dahlia!" Dave shouted at them, but was ignored. Well, his friends tuned him out when they had been the other gender too. The other gender? What, am I just accepting this strangeness now? Why the Hell not? It's not even the weirdest thing that's ever happened to us.

"I think you need to come in and sit down, Dahl… uh, Dave," Mark said. "I sent Adam to check on Rose and the witches. It's probably getting crowded down there right about now. Would you like something to drink?"

"Sure, why not?" Dave said. "I could use some water."

Mark let Dave into the apartment, and went to get him a glass from the kitchen, while Dave slumped onto the couch. Mark returned with the water. "Don't worry, I'm sure we'll get this fixed soon," he said, as he handed the glass to Dave.

"And what do you mean by fixed?" Dave asked, taking a sip. The glass held almost as much ice as water, so the liquid was numbingly cool.

"Changing you back, of course," he said, remaining on his feet. He looked as if he wanted to pace.

"I was afraid of that," Dave replied, settling the glass on his knee. Chester had sat down beside him, and now licked at the hand holding the glass. "Look, Mark, I'm not Dahlia."

"You just think—"

"What if I told you that you were the one who was supposed to be a girl? Would you want to change into one just because everyone said you should?"

"That's ridiculous. A girl version of me? I can't imagine I'd be anything like what I am if I'd been born a woman."

Dave snorted. "Yeah, it sounds ridiculous to you, but believe me, everything looks ridiculous to me. Ridiculous or not, though, I'm staying the way I am."

Mark frowned. "I… I really wish you wouldn't. But… maybe it's better this way. Maybe, if there's no chance of us being together, then Satan will leave you alone. You'll be safe—" Dave slammed the glass down on the coffee table, causing the ice and water inside to slosh about but surprisingly not breaking the glass. Chester jumped away from him with a startled yowl.

"What are you—?" Mark began, but he snapped his mouth shut when Dave bounced to his feet.

Dave barely came to Mark's chin, but he still got up close, forcing him to take a step back. "You're doing the same thing to her as Margaret did to me, aren't you? You let her get close, then push her away. Again, and again, and again!"

"Can't you see that I'm trying to protect you?"

"Oh, I get it. It's okay for you to protect me, even if that means lying to me and hurting me, but God forbid I try to protect you. That's just smothering."

"Hey, that's different. I'm a man and you're a—" Mark staggered back, rubbing his jaw where Dave had just punched him. "Hey, what the—?"

"Don't you dare say that! Where I come from you're the woman, and you still think the same way," Dave said. Chester leapt from the couch and darted into the bedroom, probably going to hide under the bed. Good, it's best if he's not here.

"Well, I'm right. It's me Satan wants. If you'd stay out of my business, you'd be safe. There's nothing you can do to help me, so why can't you leave me the Hell alone?"

"You promised to let me help!"

"You blackmailed me into that promise! I thought you were sorry for that."

"So did I, but now it's obvious that it was the only way to get you to listen to reason. You're going to get yourself killed if you try to fight him all by yourself."

Mark loomed over Dave, shaking his finger in his face. "What makes you think you can help? Since when did you become an expert on Satan?"

Dave pushed the finger aside and said, "Since I had my soul torn out, went to Hell, came back with part of me in a cat, and then had Satan try to put me back together before God smote him. What are your qualifications? Bad dreams?"

Dave leapt back when he saw the uppercut coming, so it didn't have the full force it should have, but Mark's knuckles still made contact with his chin. Dave landed poorly and nearly lost his balance, but managed to remain upright. He fingered the tender spot underneath his chin. Mark let his fists fall to his sides, where they trembled as he fought to control his hoarse breathing. He said, "You know nothing of my nightmares! Nothing!"

"Do you know what your problem is, Mark?" Dave said. "It's that you believe those dreams. You should"—he charged—"know better!"

Dave tackled Mark, arms around his waist, and they both went down.



Margaret knelt on the floor and looked under the bed, to where "Dahlia" was hiding. Chester, or whatever it was called now, watched carefully, but made no move to stop her. "Um, Dahlia?" she said. It was hard calling him that, but it was how he—she—perceived herself. "You can come out now."

"Are—are they gone?" came the quavering answer.

"Yeah, Mike and Marsha went downstairs to check on Roger and the Satanists."

"What are they?"

"For Cthulhu's sake, Dave! They're Mike and Marsha!"

A hand reached out from under the bed and Margaret grabbed hold before it could withdraw. A moment later the head appeared, the long brown hair laced with dust. The girl-Dave sneezed, puffing up a cloud of the substance. Margaret helped her to her feet, and she just stood there, eyes downcast. "I'm not Dave," she said. "And I don't know who Mike and Marsha are. They had, I mean, they were…"

"They're mutants," Margaret said, firmly. "Just like you."

"But I'm not!" she insisted, sniffling again. Margaret wondered how much of that was dust and how much emotion. "I'm not a freak!"

"I'm not saying you're a freak," Margaret said. "No more than the rest of us, although that's not saying much."

"How could I be a mutant and not be a freak, huh? You called me one yourself! It's weird enough that I have a soul-cat, but nobody notices that."

"Hey, sure, you have laservision, but that's like having the coolest superpower ever. I mean, Marsha's wings come close, but given the choice, I'd want the laservision."

"Dahlia" smiled, just a small upturning of the lips. "You always were a gun-nut."

"So you believe me now?" Margaret said.

"Maybe. I think it's weird enough to be a blue mushroom trip, at least."

"Yeah, welcome to our life," Margaret said. "Though, personally, I think it's too weird for an hallucination."

"I don't get it, though. The Mark I remember is a man's man, a martial artist and a marksman, a survivalist. You claim to be a female version of him, but I can't imagine any woman being remotely like him."

Margaret forced herself not to get angry. If any man had questioned her abilities, she'd demonstrate them until he begged for mercy. She'd given Dave ample demonstration, and he'd never even questioned her ability, although her attitude clearly bothered him. Having this female Dave express skepticism of Margaret's martial spirit was infuriating and, maybe, a bit worrisome. Margaret tried not to think about such things, but sometimes she did worry that something was wrong with her. Something that Satan was trying to exploit. "Look, I'm just as tough as any guy," she said. "In fact, I don't know any guy who can keep up with me. Except maybe you."

"Me?" she squeaked. "I'm not tough. I'm a wimp, really. Are you saying boy-me is some macho hero?"

Margaret snorted. "I'd hardly call you that. For the longest time I thought you were a wimp, and a coward. You aren't, though. I've seen you keep going when I wanted to lie down and die, because you were unwilling to give up on me. Maybe it's only danger to someone you love that brings it out of you, but you're tougher and braver than you give yourself credit."

The cat—Chelsea, Margaret thought—mewed from the bed, and girl-Dave turned around to pick it up. When she turned back, she said, "You're nicer than Mark is, at least. He keeps pushing me away just when we start to get close."

"Well, um…" Margaret cleared her throat. "Let's get out of here. This apartment isn't exactly safe for those without superpowers."

"Huh?" She looked around. "What do you mean?"

"Okay, I guess the laundry pile is just as afraid of you as you are of it, but the kitchen tends to breed things, and sometimes they get loose. I never come here unarmed myself."

Girl-Dave was nearly tripping on Margaret's heels as she followed her to the girls' apartment. Once they were settled, Margaret got her some water and they sat down on the couch. Once "Dahlia" had washed down the dust, Margaret tried to work her way around to the question she wanted to ask. It was weird, but it might clarify a few things. "Tell me about this Mark you remember."

"Why? You don't think he really exists," she replied.

"Well, no, but I do want to know what a male version of me would be like, whether he's real or just a faulty memory," Margaret said. What I really want to know is whether he's normal. Is the only thing weird about me that I'm a woman who's into these things, or… is there something else?

"Well, he's kind of a jerk," girl-Dave said. She wasn't looking at Margaret. Instead she was hunched over, her eyes on the coffee table where her finger was tracing patterns in the moisture left by the glass, so she didn't see Margaret flinch. "Like I said, you're much nicer. He's self-obsessed, thinking everything's about him, and paranoid, although not without reason, I guess. I was crazy about him at one time, but he just kept hurting me until I finally let go."

"Wait a minute," Margaret said. She suddenly had a very clear image of Mark doing to "Dahlia" some of the things she had done to Dave, and that image made her nauseous. "Are you saying that Mark hit you?"



Dave's head was whipped to the side as Mark's roundhouse punch made contact, and he toppled over. Dave was clearly overmatched. He didn't have Mark's mass or his training, and he'd barely managed to keep up for this long. His arms had been twisted in directions which they weren't meant to go from Mark's attempts to pin him in some wrestling move or other, his legs trembled at the mere thought of supporting him again, his chest and stomach ached from the bruises Mark had given him. His face was the least injured, although there was a burn from the carpet along one cheek where Dave had slid along the floor, and that last punch was likely to leave him with another black eye. In truth, though, Dave thought Mark was going easy on him. No matter how many times Dave attacked him, he always seemed to let up the moment he came close to really hurting him. Right now, he stood over Dave, but he made no move to take advantage of Dave's supine position.

"Stop this, Dahl—Dave. I don't want to hurt you," Mark said.

Dave tried to catch his breath, pulling himself up with one hand clutching the arm of the couch. "You think this hurts? No matter how many times you beat me up, it never hurt as much as what you said." He stood there with his hand on the couch's arm. He didn't think he needed it to keep standing, but it was comforting that it was there.

"You think I… hit you before?"

"All the time," he said, panting. "And I took it. You were the girl, and even if you were a psychopath, that's what I was supposed to do: take your abuse and not fight back." Dave pulled his hand from the couch, and though he tottered, he stayed on his feet.

He took a step forward and swung at Mark, but Mark was ready for him. He blocked the first punch, and the second. The third was a feint which allowed the fourth to get through, but Dave might as well have been hitting rock as Mark's stomach. Still, he'd scored a hit. Playing defense isn't working for you, is it? Apparently Mark thought the same, and when Dave attacked again, Mark caught his arm and threw him onto the floor. The air went out of Dave's lungs in a rush as his back hit the carpet and his head thumped against it, and for a moment all he saw were stars. He was beginning to appreciate the carpet. Ugly as it was, it at least cushioned his fall. A little. When he could make out the ceiling, he rolled onto his stomach and levered himself up so he could see Mark, who was standing over him.

"Stay down! Don't make me hurt you!" Mark said.

"I never stay down," Dave said, coming to his feet. "I'm too stubborn and stupid to know what's good for me."

Dave's clumsy punch missed by a mile, but at least he avoided Mark's attempt to catch hold of him. Months of trying to avoid Mike's tentacle had at least improved Dave's ability to evade grappling holds which didn't involve any superfast and superstrong tentacles. His second swing was on target, but easily blocked by Mark, who punched back this time, striking Dave square in the stomach. Dave doubled over, arms cradling his sore middle, and if Mark had swung again, he might have knocked him out. Instead he backed up.

After forcing himself to take a few painful breaths, Dave said, "You can't win, you know."

"Huh? You can barely stand!"

"No, not against me. Against Satan. You can't beat him…" He drew another painful breath.

"I know I can't stop him," Mark said. "But maybe I can make it impossible for him to use me, and stop him from hurting you."

"Alone! I ran out of breath before I could say that. You can't defeat him alone."

"Do you really think you can help me, Dahlia? What can you do?"

"Not just me. All of us. Mike—Michelle and Marvin, Adam and, um, Rose. Dahlia. We only stand a chance together."

"It's a nice sentiment, Dahlia, but what makes you think it's true? Wishful think—" This time Dave's punch scored a direct hit. Mark would have a black eye from that. Before Dave could follow up, though, Mark hammered him in the chest and he stumbled backwards.

"What do I have to do to make you stop?" Mark said as Dave staggered forward again.

Dave paused, his arm lifted and ready to swing. "Just tell me the truth."

"The truth? About what?"

"Just once, tell me how you feel about… me. No more lies, no more hypotheticals. Just say it, so I know."

"All right! All right. I feel that you're a stubborn idiot who's going to get yourself killed because you don't know what's best for you, but no matter how hard I tried to stop it, I still love you."

Dave let his fist drop. "Yeah, I thought so." He sighed, and it felt like all the strength in his body fled with that breath. His vision lost focus, and everything went dark.


This is a 2,706 word except of a 17,473 word short story.

Monday, July 7, 2008

Crossing Over: Part IV
The Rest of the Story: You can read all parts on one page by clicking on this link.

So here continues my fanfiction for CRFH. The webcomic has just gotten interesting, by suggesting that Mike, the conniving, evil schemer, is in reality the archangel Michael. It's making my brain hurt. But this story takes place before that little revelation, so I won't talk further about it.

One question that I have to ask is whether it's worthwhile to write a fanfiction. After all, I don't own the characters, so it's not really my story, is it? True, but in some ways, it's a good exercise in writing. By writing for characters other people have defined, you can learn a lot about doing characterization. By keeping to the strictures of the world, you learn a certain amount of discipline that you often need in your own stories.

So, of course, the notification. The characters, world, and events referenced belong to Maritza Campos of College Roomies from Hell!!!. Only the particular events described here are my own.


Chapter 4

Dave slammed the door behind him. For a moment there, he'd thought those guys wouldn't let him go. He'd almost been ready to use his laservision to get out of there—there was no way he could get past that Mark otherwise. He was huge! Dave's feet scuffed along the hall's carpeting as he trudged towards the elevator. It was the same ugly green color as the carpeting in his building, but he was beginning to wonder if that's where he was. The elevator door was open and some guy with blond hair was getting out. He looked familiar for some reason, but Dave was too distracted to wonder why as he slouched into the elevator.

He'd never been so insulted in his life. He'd been called a wimp, a nerd, a coward, and a freak. He'd even been called a girl—Jay made a point of calling him Petunia every time they met, although next time Dave fully intended to zap him before he got the chance—but no one had ever explained, with such complete and utter seriousness, that he really was a girl and he just thought he was a guy. They were nuts, that's just all there was to it. Only… they had known too much. They had known about the blue mushrooms and being hooked up to that machine after Mike's ill-begotten raid, and about Satan stealing his soul and part of it ending up in Chester, and Roger's werecoyoteness. That was the reason that the part of Dave's mind that wasn't fuming right now was freaking out. Oddly, they hadn't known about Dave's laservision, as they had just stared at him blankly when he told them to get out of his way or he'd zap them. For them to know so much meant that someone must have told them. It had to be a prank, one of Mike's, or worse, maybe one of Waldo's and Steve's. If it was Mike, he was just messing with his head, and Dave would fry some calamari next time he saw him. If it was Waldo and Steve, then they probably wanted something, but they were such idiots that there was no way any logical reasoning would tell him what. They probably thought he had Satan's Fruit Basket or something. What worried Dave a great deal more was the possibility that it was someone else, that it was him. Whatever Mike and Roger said, he didn't believe that he was invulnerable to Satanic attack. He'd gotten help several times now, the miraculous shotgun and the divine dry-cleaning for sure, maybe some others depending on how you counted them, but he didn't think it was all about him. If he'd gotten help, it was because he was a piece in a bigger game, and that didn't do much to comfort him at all. And even if Satan had been, and would continue to be, stopped when he tried the direct approach, that didn't mean he couldn't make Dave suffer. He'd certainly done plenty of that before without God stepping in and putting an end to it. Hey you up there! Why can't you just tell us what's going on? Why all the mystery and subtle interventions? It's not like the other guy's shy about being direct. Dave would have continued, but he realized he was asking God why he wasn't more like Satan, and figured it wasn't a good idea to insult the big guy. The last thing I want to do is get on His bad side too.

The elevator dinged and the door opened. Dave looked around, wondering why he was at the lobby. Some other people he had never seen before got on and he stepped off, realizing that he'd been so lost in his thoughts that he'd forgotten to push a button, so the elevator had just gone to its next call location. Well, at least this gave Dave a chance to make sure he was in the right building. He looked around the lobby. It had to be his apartment building: it had the same ugly green carpet, the same speckled walls, the same lack of anything that might indicate taste. The layout was the same, with double glass doors, the unmanned reception desk—he'd never seen anyone there—and the mailboxes on the left. The numbers on the front door, backwards from this side of the glass, were right, but he went outside anyway and glanced up and down the street. Yes, this was definitely his apartment building. So why did all the people he had seen look like strangers? Oddly familiar strangers, he had to admit, but they were not the people he knew. He headed back to the elevator, got on and pressed the button for his floor.

Arriving there, Dave got off the elevator and headed towards his room, pulling the key out of his pocket. Chester was clinging to his chest, as he often did, and despite the pain from the sharp claws, Dave enjoyed his soul-cat's proximity. It'd be less painful if he was on his shoulder though. Dave used one hand to support Chester, as he dug in deeper when he was supporting himself, while he unlocked the door with the other. It opened easily, confirming that this was indeed his apartment. He heard some motion in front of him, and looked to see the tops of two black-haired heads poking above the back of the couch, obviously engaged in some sort of lip-lock.

"Oh God, you two," Dave said. "Get a room or something. Preferably not mine."

Two faces appeared beneath the tousled hair, staring at him, and they did not belong to Mike and Marsha.

"Who the Hell are you?" they said together.

"I'm Dave; I live here," he said, suddenly uncertain. He had walked into the apartment thinking everything seemed okay, but looking around now, he was noticing all sorts of things which were wrong. First and foremost, it was just too clean. There was no way that Mike could live here. There were no socks on the ceiling fan, no dirty dishes on the table, no pile of dirty laundry wandering about. The kitchen door was open, which in itself was unusual as they had taken to keeping the door closed to keep the mist from poisoning the air in the rest of the apartment. It had been better since Mike and Marsha cleaned the kitchen, but now that she'd moved out it had been gradually returning to its normal state of toxicity. This kitchen looked clean. What's more, besides the cleanliness, the furniture and decorations were a good deal better than anything Dave had ever owned. It looked like someone well-to-do lived here, probably female and well-to-do, to judge from the curtains on the windows and the decorative knickknacks hanging from the walls.

"I don't think so!" the female member of the couple said. "If Dahlia's invited you to move in with us, I'll ship her to Mexico. I warned her about taking in strays."

"Huh?" Dave said. That "ship to Mexico" crack would have done more to get his attention if his eyes hadn't finally located something he recognized. "Look, if this isn't my apartment, what are you doing with that?" he said, pointing to a hand-drawn poster of a blue dragon breathing flames.

"That? That's Dahlia's. Rose gave it to her. Don't tell me she gave it to you?"

"But…" Dave said, at a loss for words.

"Look, Mister," the guy said, "I don't know who you are, but I think Michelle wants you to leave. If you are Dahlia's… friend, then come back with her. Otherwise, leave before we toss you out." He stood up, revealing a long-sleeved blue and white shirt that was only partially tucked in.

The girl stood up with him. Her designer halter-top probably cost more than Dave's entire wardrobe. She looped her arm around her boyfriend's and leaned against him. "Now, now, Marv. No need to get violent… yet. I'm sure—David, was it?—was just leaving."

Violent? It hadn't even occurred to Dave that this Marv was trying to intimidate him. The guy was a little bit bigger than he was, but his laservision could knock aside a car, for God's sake. It had been a long time since he'd been intimidated just because someone was bigger, not unless they were armed, psycho, had a tendency to be possessed, or, as seemed to happen with alarming frequency, at least two out of three. He looked from the couple to the familiar poster. Rose had given it to Dahlia? That was crazy. Roger had given it to him! He looked back at the couple, and for a moment he saw their roles reversed. If Michelle were a guy, a bit taller and with a tentacle instead of a left arm, and if Marv—Marvin, probably—were a girl with wings… Yeah, they did look like Mike and Marsha, and that freaked him out worse than anything else.

"All-all right, I'm leaving," he said, backing slowly through the door.

Once he had shut the door behind him, he wondered where exactly he was planning to go. This was his apartment. It was his building, his room number, the lock matching his key, and his poster inside. It had to be his apartment. But who were Michelle and Marvin? Were they really a reversed gender version of Mike and Marsha? He leaned his forehead against the wall next to the door. He had thought that Mark and Adam were playing a prank on him, a very complex one set up for unknown reasons by somebody who knew most of his secrets. That might have explained them, but it didn't explain what had happened to his apartment. Even if Mike wanted to set up that elaborate of a joke, he could not have gotten their apartment that clean in the time since Dave left for class today. And besides Mike, who else had the resources? Steve and Waldo could never have managed anything like this. So what else was there? He kept coming back to what Mark and Adam had told him. That everything he remembered about his life was a lie, and he was in reality a girl transformed into a guy by Waldo and Steve—only they were really Wendy and Stella, and they had been turned around in his memories along with everyone else.

"No. No way. I'm a guy, and I've been one all my life. Right, Chester?" Chester stared up at him with his large eyes, but didn't say anything. He was worried, Dave could tell, but that could just be the feedback of his own worry. "But how do I know? How do I prove it?"

He turned around and slid down the wall until he was sitting on the floor, Chester on his lap. Okay, aside from the gender of everyone and their freaking brother—or sister, I suppose—everything else is the same as I remember it. Everything except… The mutations. Neither Michelle nor Marvin had shown any signs of tentacles or wings. "And what about me?" he asked Chester. "Let's say Mark and Adam are right and the two Satanists changed me from a girl to a guy and messed up my memories. That wouldn't give me laservision, would it? Screwed up spell or not, laservision has nothing to do with my gender. That came from the misery journey, which I suppose was a pretty guy-like thing to do, but that's not the same thing. So, if my laservision works, that means the events of the misery journey really happened, every last miserable one of them."

He reached into a pocket and brought out the largest coin he could find. A nickel. Well, I'm definitely as poor as I remember. As he flipped it into the air, everything in sight took on a blue tint as he started building up his energy. His eyes should be glowing right now. At least, he hoped they were. When the coin reached its apex, he released the pressure behind his eyeballs, and the air sizzled as blue light lanced through it to strike the nickel. It worked! The narrow beam scattered in a thousand different directions as it hit the coin, and the nickel itself went flying. Dave heard a crunch as it buried itself in the far wall. He'd put more energy into the blast than he'd meant to.

"Yes! Who's the man? I am!" he yelled, probably a bit too loudly, as the doors on either side of him opened, Mark looking out from one and Michelle from the other. He turned red under their curious and withering stares, respectively.

"Why is he still here?" Michelle asked no one in particular.



"Why is she still there?" Mike asked no one in particular.

The "there" in question was under Dave's bed, where the girl had vanished moments after she had seen Mike's and Marsha's mutations. It wouldn't be the first time that someone had a bad reaction to Mike's tentacle—although Marsha was considerably shaken that her wings had contributed to the girl's reaction—but usually they ran away and that was that. Unfortunately, this girl was deep under Dave's bed, and only an occasional whimpering sob escaped. Mike would have just pulled her out, but a black cat lay curled up on top of the bed. It looked to be asleep, but when Mike had tried to reach under the bed a moment ago, it had been on top of him in an instant, hissing and scratching. After a minute of yelling like an idiot while trying to shake it off, he'd escaped with long scratches covering both his arm and his tentacle.

"Sheesh, even Dave gets over panicking quicker than this," Mike said.

"Come to think of it," Marsha said, her wings fluttering as she knelt on the floor, head near the dusty floor as she tried to get a better look under the bed, "Didn't she kind of look like Dave?"

"A little. And is that cat Chester or not? I thought he liked you." The cat had hissed loudly when Marsha had approached after Mike's aborted attempt, so she refused to get any closer to the bed.

"Could she be Dave's sister?" Marsha asked. "That might explain why Chester's so protective of her."

"Dave doesn't have a sister. A cousin, maybe?"

There was a knock on the apartment door, followed immediately by the sound of the door opening. "What's going on in here?" came Margaret's voice. "I thought I heard yelling." She stopped as she reached the bedroom door and saw Marsha trying to look under the bed. "What are you looking at?"

"Some girl," Marsha said. "She's hiding under Dave's bed for some reason. Do you know who—"

"Hiding? Mike, what did you do?"

"Me? Nothing," Mike said. "We were just minding our own business when she walks in like she owns the place and starts berating us, but the moment she sees our mutations she freaks out. Who is she? She looks sort of like Dave."

"She is Dave," Margaret said.

"Wha?"

Margaret explained, "Waldo and Steve somehow turned Dave into a girl. They messed up his memories too, because now he thinks he's been a girl his whole life."

"Are you sure that's Dave?" Mike asked.

"I saw it happen with my own eyes," Margaret said. "Besides, not only does 'Dahlia' look just like Dave, she remembers the soul-stealing, Waldo and Steve, the blue mushroom trips. The memories are all turned around, and the people are all the wrong sex, but most everything's there."

"But not the mutations," Marsha said.

"And isn't that odd?" Mike replied. "Even if they screwed with his memories, you'd think he'd remember something as big as that. I wonder if that was the intention. I think I'll have a little talk with those two. Where are they now?"

"In their apartment. Roger's keeping an eye on them."

"Good. We'll play good cop/bad cop. I get to be the bad cop."

"I want to be the bad cop," Marsha said. When Mike looked at her, she said, "Hey, it's not often that I get to interrogate people for justice. All of the fun, none of the court orders."


This has been a 2,722 word excerpt of a 17,473 word short story.

Monday, May 12, 2008

Crossing Over: Part III
The Rest of the Story: The whole story can be found here.

This is Part III of my CRFH fanfiction. It's also the part where I reveal what's actually going on to the readers, although I keep the characters in the dark for a while. For those familiar with CRFH, the timing of events happens immediately after April's Secret.

As always, all the characters, the world(s), and the events referenced belong to Maritza Campos, copyright 1999-2008. Only the events of this story belong to me.


Crossing Over
Chapter 3


Dave yawned and blinked his eyes. What had happened? The last thing he remembered he had been lying in the grass, certain he was going to choke to death. Whatever he was lying on now, it was soft and cushioned, and he wasn't choking, although he felt groggy and weak. He tried to look around him, but everything was blurry, like he couldn't bring the world into focus. A face hovered close by, however, one with curly brown hair and blue eyes, and a rough, calloused hand held his own.

"Mar— Marg…" he mumbled, his mouth clumsy and unable to form the name.

"Shh. It's okay. I'm here. You—you're going to be all right."

"What the…?" It wasn't the doubt in the voice that shook him, but the timbre of it. That wasn't Margaret's voice. And the hand holding his was much too big. He pulled his hand free and pushed himself back, bumping his head against the cushioned arm of what he now realized was a couch that he was lying on. A startled meow reproved him, and the weight he hadn't even noticed on his stomach departed as Chester leapt to the floor. By the time he had managed to sit up, his back propped against the couch's arm, he was able to see clearly. The guy kneeling next to the couch was big, with more muscles than Dave had ever dared wish for himself. He had brown hair and blue eyes, but he was definitely not Margaret. He looked concern, unduly so for a stranger. There was another guy behind him, this one tall and wiry with blond hair and a goatee, and he was watching Dave with a wary expression, as if uncertain what Dave would do.

"Calm down, Dahlia," the brown haired guy said. "I know it's strange, but we'll get you back to normal soon, I promise."

"Who the Hell is Dahlia?" Dave said. "And who are you?"

"You—you don't recognize me—us—at all?" he said uncertainly.

"I've never seen you before in my life. Although..." Dave took a closer look at him. Now that he had calmed down a bit, he could see that there was a similarity to Margaret. Not just the hair and the eyes, but the shape of the face, the nose. "You do look enough like Margaret to be her brother. But you can't be; her whole family's dead." A brief spasm crossed the guy's face, but then it relaxed into a look of concern.

"I don't know a Margaret, but my name's Mark."

"And I'm Adam," said the other one. "And you are?"

Mark gave Adam an odd look, one Dave couldn't read. "My name's Dave. And my cat there is Chester. C'mere, Chester." Chester leapt into his arms, eager as always to be with his soul-mate. "What am I doing here? What happened to me? I remember being stung, but if that had been a bee I'd either be in a hospital or dead right now."

Adam smiled. "I'd guess that was a tranquilizer dart or something. We found you in the hands of the Satanists. They were performing some ritual in their apartment."

"Oh, God. What the xhlemphregomfortness were Steve and Waldo up to? Haven't they tried to feed my soul to demons enough times?"

"Uh, yeah," Mark said. "Could you wait here a moment? Adam and I need to talk about something."

"Sure. Thanks for helping me out, by the way. I like my soul where it is."

"Uh huh. Adam, let's go to the kitchen for a moment."

Dave watched them walk away. Something about Adam seemed familiar, although Dave couldn't quite place it. Not just how he looked, but something about how he moved, lightly, and ready to spring in any direction. Kind of like April when she was nervous. Dave shook his head. If they knew Waldo and Steve, then they were probably at the college. In fact, looking around the apartment, the layout was very similar to his own, or the girls'. The furnishing was sparse and functional, as was usual for guys rooming together. It was not quite the environmental disaster area that Dave's apartment tended towards, but then they didn't live with Mike. Still, move a few things around, add some completely unnecessary decorations and frip-frappery, and it would look just like the girls' place. He must be in the same building, then, which was odd, as Dave thought he had met most of the tenants. He didn't really know them all, but he'd seen them around by now. He glanced back at Mark and Adam, who were in an intense but quiet conversation, and wondered what they were talking about.



"Well, his mind is just as screwed up as his body!" Margaret exclaimed once they were out of earshot of "Dahlia."

"Are you sure she's Dave?" April asked. "If she thinks she's been a girl all her life, maybe it's because she has."

"I'd agree if he didn't remember most everything, even if it's all twisted around. Demons stealing his soul, Chester, Waldo and Steve, all the stuff I told him about my family. Only now all those things happened to Dahlia, Chelsea, and Mark. The memories are fake, but accurate."

"Well, what do you want to do about it? We have to tell her, right?"

"What do we say? Hey, Dahlia, you're really a guy named Dave whose been turned into a woman by those Satanists, and in the process your mind got all screwed around too. He's not going to believe that."

"If it's really Dave, weirdness and altered states of reality should be normal for him. Though… he'll probably freak out at first. That's standard Dave reaction to most anything strange and frightening. Of course, once you get him past the freaking out he's good to kick butt up until the point he collapses from pain and exhaustion."

"Even then he doesn't stay down. Once he regains consciousness, he'll get back up and do it again," Margaret said with a fond smile. "Believe it or not, he really is the toughest guy I know."

If you two could just get your act together, you could actually be happy together, April thought, but there was no point in rubbing salt in old wounds. "So we're agreed? We tell her?"

"Him, not her. Are you sure about this? If we screw up his mind worse than it already is…"

"If it is Dave, I don't think that's possible."

"Point. Okay, then…"

"Guys," they heard a voice behind them. "I appreciate the help and all, but I really ought to be going." Dahlia was standing in front of the couch, Chelsea in her arms. She still looked a little wobbly.

"Wait a moment, Dahlia," Margaret said. "We need to talk to you about something important."

"Huh? What is it? 'Cause I'd like to go lie down in my own bed for a while. I feel like my head's about to fall off."

"Where do you live, Dahlia?" April asked.

"I live in this building. At least, I think this is the same building. I'm on the floor just above Wendy and Stella."

"Okay, I'm just going to be direct…" Margaret began.

"No you aren't. Let me handle this, Margaret," April said.

"Okay, but if you don't get to the point quick, I'll do it for you."

"Ooookay. Dahlia, have you ever seen a blue mushroom?"

"Oh God, I hate those things. Don't tell me you've had a blue mushroom trip, too."

"Yes, we have. And you know how sometimes in those hallucinations, things can be completely weird, but it seems like it's exactly the way it's supposed to be? But really, it's that your brain can't remember the way things are supposed to be, so you just accept the hallucination"

"Uh-huh. What are you getting at?" Dahlia asked.

"Well, we think maybe you're experiencing something like that right now."

"You're saying this is a hallucination?" she said. "You're kidding. Where's the superhero outfits? Where's Hell? This is just too ordinary for an hallucination."

"Yeah, we're not saying this is an hallucination. What we're thinking is that you actually do know who we are, you just aren't remembering us correctly."

"Huh?"

"This Mark guy you mentioned. He's a real gun nut, really good with martial arts, very reluctant to let people get close to him?"

"Yeah. Do you know him?"

"Sort of. This is Margaret. She's a real gun nut, great martial artist, doesn't let people get close to her. Do you see where this is going?"

Dahlia frowned prettily. "No, not really. Are they related?"

"No, Dahlia, they're the same person."

"That's crazy," Dahlia said, hugging Chelsea so close she mewed. "You're not making any sense. You're saying, you're saying… what? That this is a blue mushroom trip and Margaret's really Mark, he just looks like a woman?"

"No, you idiot," Margaret said, interrupting. "I am a woman. You're the one…"

"Hold on, Margaret," April said, putting a hand on her arm. "No, it's more like when we were hooked up to the machine, where we thought we'd been friends with the kids from the Sci-Fi club for months."

"Hey, how did you know about that?" Dahlia said, wide-eyed.

"I was there. So were you. Well, sort of. The point is that our memories had been altered, we were remembering things differently than how they had happened. We think the same thing is happening to you here. This Mark you're remembering is really Margaret, you're just remembering her as a guy. When, in fact, she's a girl and she's always been one."

"That can't be. Mark and I had… we…" Dahlia was blushing bright red. "If he was really a girl, then that'd mean I was a lesbian, and I'm not. Mark can't be a girl."

"You're not a lesbian, Dahlia," Margaret growled. "Because up to an hour ago, you weren't a girl."

"Wha??"

"Subtle as always, Margaret," April said with a sigh. "What we're saying is that you're actually a guy named Dave, and Waldo and Steve—the Satanists you were calling Wendy and Stella—turned you into a girl and somehow mixed up your memories to boot."

"That has got to be the craziest thing I've ever heard," Dahlia said. "And I live with Rose. I am a girl and I've been one all my life. You're making this up. Did Michelle put you up to this? It'd be just like her."

"Yes, it's crazy," Margaret said. "But is it crazier than what we get mixed up in daily? Crazier than getting your soul stolen by Satan and ending up sharing it with a cat? Crazier than living with a werecoyote? Crazier than being a mutant freak with laservision?"

"Mutant freak?! I may have lived through some strange stuff, but I'm not a freak! Laservision? You really are crazy! If I had laservision I'd have blasted down that door by now." Dahlia said, angry, but she seemed scared too. "With or without it, I'm leaving. Don't try to stop me, or Mark will wring your necks."

"Okay, go," April said. "Your apartment is next door. Look around and then tell us that everything's like you remember it."

"I won't be telling you anything, because I won't be seeing you again. Good-bye, ladies," she said. She crossed the kitchen floor, skirting wide of both girls, whipped open the door and went out, slamming it shut behind her.

"Well, we flubbed that pretty bad," April said.

Margaret shrugged. "There wasn't any gentle way to do it. Once he realizes we're telling the truth, he'll be back."


This is a 1,943 word excerpt of a 17,474 word story.

For reasons probably having a lot to do with the Japanese manga Ranma 1/2, transgender stories (where one of the characters literally changes sex) are all the rage in webcomics these days. Aside from the numerous webcomics with it as a premise, a lot of otherwise normal webcomics have TG stories (It's Walky!, The Order of the Stick!, even Sluggy in a print story). College Roomies from Hell is not one of them: instead, CRFH has a TG universe, an alternate reality where all of the cast members are the opposite sex. This has only appeared in the daily comic once, but the cartoonist initially created, and fleshed out, this universe in the forums. This story is based on a cross over between the normal CRFH universe and the TG one, but for the first couple of chapters I teased my readers with the possibility that this was in fact a TG story. Aside from being a good gimmick for getting webcomic readers to read my story, it kept them from what this story is really all about. Which I'll tell you as soon as we get to that part, somewhere around July.

Friday, May 2, 2008

Crossing Over: Part II
The Rest of the Story: The whole story can be found here.

The problem with writing a fanfiction is that it doesn't make a lot of sense unless the readers have the context to understand it. Mine is even worse, since you really have to be aware of things in the forum community, not just in CRFH. Still, I like the story. And if you want the quick rundown of events, you can try here, where I talk a bit about the comic.

As before, all the characters, the world(s), and the events referenced belong to Maritza Campos, copyright 1999-2008. Only the events of this story belong to me.


Crossing Over

Chapter 2

"Change him back. Now!" Margaret shoved her pistol up under Steve's jaw, forcing his head back.

"I don't know how!" Steve panted, his eyes crossed in an attempt to look at the gun. "That isn't what was supposed to happen!"

"Well, what was supposed to happen?"

"It was a B-b-banishment spell. You know, to send him to another plane of existence."

"Why the Hell would you want to do that?"

"It was the Boss's idea, to get Dave out of the way. He figured simple Banishment was something he wouldn't be protected against."

Margaret stared at him. Finding out Dave was protected spooked her almost as much as thinking he was a target. She still wasn't sure how much she believed of it all. Even the miracles could be some sort of infernal trick, but she was beginning to believe that Satan might be… frightened by something about Dave. That just made it more important to keep him from getting mixed up in what Satan was doing to her.

"Well," said Roger. "If they messed up the spell, then maybe they could reverse it if they just repeat what they did."

"Roger, I don't think casting the same messed-up spell twice is going to fix the problem," Margaret replied.

"You're right. Maybe they should do it backwards."

"Look, gun nut, our spell was fine before the cat and the coyote messed with it," Steve said. "That's what screwed it up. Even if we did exactly the same thing, the result of a miscast is random. We'd never be able to repeat it."

Margaret looked at Waldo, who was still standing with his hands up despite the fact that no one was paying attention to him. She had even let her aim drift so the gun wasn't lined up on him any longer. She quickly brought it back on target. Both of them were idiots and cowards, but Waldo was more of both. "Waldo, what do you think?"

"It's all his fault. I just did what he said."

"Okay, you two are going to come up with a solution," Margaret said. "If you don't have something in twenty-four hours, I'm going to have to hurt you."

"We can't do it at gun-point, you know," Steve said. "Why don't you leave us alone to work on it?"

"Why? So you can flee to another country?"

"I'm serious. We can't work with you here."

"Yeah," Waldo chimed in. "You're one scary chick. You make us nervous."

"Okay, I'll leave, but Roger's staying."

"What?" all three of them said at once.

"You can't leave us with him. He'll melt our brains," Steve said, while Waldo said, "He's so nuts he makes you look unnutty."

"Roger will keep an eye on you, and he'll go all werecoyote on you if you give him half a reason. Right, Roger?" Margaret said.

"Mmmmokay," said Roger. "But if they turn me into a girl I'm moving in with you."

"Fine, whatever. I'm taking Dave out of here."

"Wait!" Steve said. "You can't take her—him—away. We'll never be able to reverse the spell if we can't, um… study her, I mean him."

"Yeah, right," Margaret said as she holstered her pistols. She leaned down and rolled the still unconscious Dave onto his stomach, then placed her hands beneath his abdomen as she pulled him onto his knees. She wasn't sure what disturbed her more, the breasts, the long hair in her face, or simply the fact that Dave was much lighter than he should have been. Still, it wasn't going to be easy to manhandle him all the way up to the apartment. His head lolled as Margaret lifted him to his feet, then got in front to drape him across her shoulders in a fireman's carry. She straightened, then glared at Steve and Waldo. "Roger, if they give you any trouble, eat them."

"Ick. They smell like brimstone. I don't even want to think about what they taste like."

"Hey, you can't eat us! If you do, who's going to fix this?" Steve said.

"Yeah," added Waldo, just as eloquent as ever.

"You're right," Margaret replied. "But if Roger starts with your toes, there should still be enough of you left to do the job."

"Ugh. Margaret, I do not want to eat their smelly feet. Now an ear, that wouldn't be so bad."

"Okay, okay," Steve said. "We get the idea."

Margaret got Dave out the door, and headed to the elevator. Chester followed, mewing constantly. Something sounded off about it, but Margaret didn't have time to worry about that as she stabbed the up button on the elevator. The elevator was already on the way from the ground floor, and it arrived almost immediately. Margaret was just wondering how she was going to explain this if there was someone inside when the door opened and Margaret found herself face-to-face with April.

"Whoa," she said. "Margaret, what are you doing carrying that girl around? Who is she?"

"This girl is Dave," she said as she set him down on the elevator's floor, his back against the wall.

"You're kidding. I know he's into some weird stuff, but cross-dressing? I mean, again?" She knelt down for a closer look. "Okay, you're definitely kidding. There's no way this is Dave in a dress." She actually poked the left breast.

"Hey, stop that!" Margaret slapped her hand away. The elevator had reached their floor and the door opened. "Help me get him to our apartment and I'll explain."

They lifted Dave between them, one on either side, and carried him to the apartment. Holding him upright, it was clear that he was now shorter than either of them, and his feet hovered a couple of inches off the ground. By the time they lay him on the couch, Margaret had finished telling April what had happened.

"Wow, I had no idea that Steve and Waldo could do something like that," April said.

"I believe it," Margaret said. "They couldn't do it in a thousand years if they actually wanted to, but by accident? It's a wonder they haven't turned themselves into frogs by now."

"Nah, they'd turn us into frogs instead," April replied. "Every time anybody gets mutated or cursed or possessed, it's always one of us. Those two may be idiots, but somehow they ended up with the good luck while we ended up with the bad."

"Wow, you're cheery," Margaret said.

"Actually I am," she replied, with a brighter smile than Margaret had seen her wear in a long time. "Yes, it's weird, but we're still alive, and meanwhile things are certainly interesting."

"Okay, I think you've gone nuts. Are you sure you're okay?"

"It's just… I've been thinking. For the longest time I thought I was a freak. I didn't think I fit in where I grew up, and then I tried the real world, only to realize that I couldn't fit in here either. I thought that I was incomplete, not made for one place or the other. Then a friend reminded me that as weird as my life had been, it wasn't any weirder than what you guys go through on a daily basis. I'm really not an outsider here, but I came very close to making myself one by letting my anger with Mike get in the way of my friendship with the rest of you. And… I'm sorry."

"Apology accepted and I'm glad for you and all that, but can we focus on Dave here?"

April rolled her eyes. "Okay, okay. Well, aside from being a she, he seems okay. Chester seems to be taking this calmly." The cat had curled itself on Dave's abdomen and closed his eyes. "Uh, do you think it's just cosmetic changes, or do you think it's, you know, complete?" April was blushing a deep red by the time she finished.

"I haven't checked and I'm not going to," Margaret said, her face beginning to grow warm as well. "We can ask him when he wakes up."

"Wait a second," April said. "You said Chester ran into the circle as well?"

"Yes. Why?"

"I was just thinking that something seemed different about him." She reached down and picked up Chester, holding him up with a hand beneath each foreleg and looking at his exposed stomach. Margaret wondered what she was doing. Chester just stared at April curiously until she put him down on Dave's stomach again. "Well, that answers that."

"What answers what?"

"Think, Margaret! Chester ran into the circle as well. He seems different. That's because he is now a she too. And having had a close look at her, I think I can now say that the change is complete, at least for everything on the outside."

"Oh. Oh! I didn't even think to check. You don't think…"

"Shhh. I think she's waking up."

Margaret looked at Dave. His jaw was open in a yawn and his eyes were fluttering open, so she knelt down beside the couch and took his hand. It was small and soft and she almost dropped it in consternation, but she held on for his sake.


This has been a 1,531 word excerpt of a 17,474 word story.

Sunday, April 6, 2008

Crossing Over: Part I
This is going to be a little bit of a peculiar story for me. It's a fanfiction for College Roomies from Hell!!!. Now I don't usually write fanfiction: I prefer to work in my own world. However, every once in a while I'm inspired by the possibilities I see in someone else's characters. And for once, I decided that if the author wasn't going to explore those possibilities, I would.

The problem with working in someone else's world is that it doesn't make sense to people who aren't familiar with the comic. Even those who are will probably miss some of what I refer to if they don't read the forums. So the question, then, is why am I posting the story here? Well, the first reason is because I think it turned out fairly nicely. The second is that, because of a forum upgrade, the version that I posted there has apparently disappeared. And since I want to preserve this story, I decided to post it on my blog.

So, first the legal stuff. All the characters, the world(s), and the events referenced belong to Maritza Campos, copyright 1999-2008. Only the events of this story belong to me.


Crossing Over

Chapter 1

When Dover dismissed the class, Dave was the first one out the door. Not that long ago he would have lingered, waiting to see which way Margaret would go, perhaps following her if a good enough excuse came to mind. Not this time. He wasn't avoiding her, not exactly, but it seemed that they'd said all there was to say, and he was just tired of trying to convince her. She would listen patiently and nod in the right places, but nothing ever seemed to get through. She just had no faith, and what was worse, she had no hope. Dave didn't know how much faith he himself had. For a guy who'd seen as many miracles as he had, he still wasn't sure what he believed about God and the Devil, what rules they were supposed to follow, or whether he could trust either of them to do so, but hope was the one thing he held onto no matter how hard the world tried to snatch it from his fingers.

Dave took a right and headed for the back of the building, past the classrooms being renovated to the rear stairwell. Inside was a little used back door, which he went through, intending to take an out-of-the-way route back to the apartment. It was longer this way, but he could be reasonably certain that he wouldn't run into Margaret or anyone else he knew. In fact, once he reached the grassy alley where the biology and physics buildings stood back-to-back, there wasn't anyone at all. The sun was blocked by the Ryan S. Majison Building, where all the physics students were spending their afternoon in labs, leaving the alley cool and shadowed. A few dandelions nodded tiredly as Dave walked past. By the time he got home, she would either be in her apartment or perhaps in the library, and he wouldn't need to talk to her unless she came looking for him, a thought that made him nervous rather than excited these days. His feet left a trail in the tall grass which no one bothered to keep trimmed.

"Yow!" Something had just stung the back of his neck. What if it's a bee?! Trying to quell the rising panic, he slapped at it. That was a mistake, and he winced as the stinger went deeper. His fingers fumbled with the oddly still insect, which seemed about the right size for a very large bee. "Ohmygodohmygodohmygod," he said as brought it before his eyes, trying to focus his blurry sight on its feathery red-and-black body. If it was a bee, it was a giant mutant one. He needed to find help before he choked to death. He started to run, but he only made it a few lurching steps before he fell, his face planted in the soft grass and his nose in the dirt. He tried to push himself back up, but his arms were weak and useless. Darkness filled his eyes.



Roger shifted Fluffy to his other arm as he opened the front door to the apartment building. He hadn't had a chance to take Fluffy for a walk this morning before class, and it was getting antsy. Fluffy wasn't the only one who had needed a walk. Chester had been freaking out over something, and he'd darted out the apartment door the moment Roger opened it upon arriving home. Roger hadn't even seen which way he'd gone. Well, Dave would find him when he got home. Hopefully, Chester wouldn't be caught by Satan again, or worse, the hot dog man. There were in fact a few things worse than having your soul torn out, and the hot dog man knew them all. Roger whistled as he headed down the street, Fluffy cradled in his arm. The tune died out once he recognized it as something his mother used to sing. He still hadn't told his father and sister that she was dead. Margaret had actually volunteered to come with him when he did, which was just the sort of honorable and stupid thing she would do. His family didn't know that his mother used to hunt humans, and they certainly didn't need to meet the prey who had fought back. Roger's animal instinct considered Margaret part of his pack, but he still had to be careful to keep his anger control when he was around her. He had no desire to test how good Lily's self-control was by introducing her to the complete stranger who had killed her mother.

Roger tried to move his mind to other things, such as his alphabetized popcorn collection. He had just found one that looked exactly like Mike, or would have if he'd had a more normal sized nose and longer hair. He'd show it to him, only Mike'd probably eat it.

"H'astur, this is heavy!" The voice came from the alley by the apartment. It sounded like that idiot, Steve.

"Well, we'll lose the weight soon. Heheheh." And that would be Waldo, the idiot-in-training.

Roger looked down the alley as he passed, but all he saw was the rear door swinging shut. Whatever they were doing, they were certainly up to no good, but that pretty much accounted for their every waking moment. "We'll just have to watch out for them, won't we, Fluffy? That and make sure they don't get a hold of Satan's Fruit Basket. That would be bad."

Roger continued on his walk, but between thoughts of his mother and of Waldo and Steve, he'd lost interest in enjoying the admiring stares he received whenever he carried Fluffy around, so he returned home after only half-an-hour. Dave still wasn't home, nor was Chester. Mike was gone too, but he was probably with Marsha, so Roger wasn't worried about him. But he was beginning to worry about Chester. The way he ran off could be nothing, or it could indicate that Dave was in trouble. Well, if anyone knew where Dave was… Roger screwed up his courage and went across the hall to knock on the girls' door.

Margaret answered right away. When she saw him, she tried a smile that failed miserably. "What do you need, Roger?" she said. Every time she spoke to him he heard the implied I'm sorry I killed your mother.

Roger tried not to grit his teeth. He hadn't fully forgiven her, even though he was determined not to hold it against her, but what he really wanted to do was wipe that look of pity from her face. Instead, he said as neutrally as possible, "Have you seen Dave? I'm worried about Chester."

"No, I haven't seen him since Calculus. I was looking for him too. Why, what's wrong with Chester?" All things considered, Margaret had taken the news of Dave's soul-cat pretty well, but that might have been the drugs at the time. She had taken to avoiding Chester since then.

"I have no idea, but he ran off like a bat out of Heaven. I think Dave might be in trouble."

"Don't you mean a bat out of Hell?"

"No, Hell's dark and warm. I'm pretty sure bats like it. Heaven's all bright and airy, so--"

"All right, I believe you. Let me get my .45s," she said.

While Margaret got her weapons from her gun closet, Roger came just inside the door. If they were going to look for Dave, maybe he should bring Fluffy, but he didn't want to risk something happening to it. Besides, if they could find Chester, they'd find Dave quickly enough. Finding Chester would be easy if Roger went were, but he was avoiding that these days. Even more than before. Roger wasn't completely certain, but he thought he was more vulnerable when were. They had enough problems without tempting Satanic possession.

"You want something, Rog?" Margaret called from the closet. "The shotgun, maybe?"

"No, I'm fine," Roger said. "Let's go."

Margaret had tucked her guns underneath her leather jacket, where she had specially designed holsters to keep them inconspicuous. She and Roger went out the door and nearly stepped on Chester, who had returned while they weren't looking. He mewed at them, then headed toward the stairs, where he paused to look back at them.

"What is it, boy? Is Davey trapped in a well?" Roger asked.

"Roger…" Margaret growled.

"What? Chester's at least as smart as Lassie."

"Chester's at least as smart as Dave, but do you really think he wants us to follow him?"

"Well, duh! Let's see where he wants us to go."

Chester stopped at the door to the stairway, where he waited patiently until they opened the door. Then he darted down a flight and stopped at the door at that level, mewing for them to hurry. At least that's what Roger assumed he wanted. He trotted down the stairs, Margaret right behind, and pulled the door open quickly enough that Chester had to dodge in order to avoid being hit in the nose with it. After an angry snort—a sound Roger was pretty sure that normal cats couldn't make—he shot down the hallway, Margaret and Roger close behind. Chester stopped at a familiar door, back arched and hissing. Roger felt his stomach flip. He might have to go werecoyote after all.

"Why am I not surprised?" Margaret asked as she stared at Steve's and Waldo's door. "The only question is whether we break down the door, or knock first, then break it down."

Roger said, reaching for the doorknob. "Well, I guess we should check…" The knob turned easily. "…first. Never mind." Roger pushed the door open.

The light from the hallway stretched across the darkened dining area to the living room, falling upon a pentagram. Within, Dave lay spread-eagle, unconscious and unmoving. Black candles were arranged around him at odd intervals, some lit and some unlit. The lit ones were the only source of light, as heavy black garbage bags were blocking the windows. Two figures in dark robes stood on either side of the pentagram, both staring at the door.

"You idiot!" Steve yelled. "I told you to lock the door."

"You never said that," Waldo replied. "You only told me to shut it."

"It was implied!"

"It's not my fault I'm not psychic. Who's the one who said they wouldn't miss him for a couple of hours? It looks like you're no psychochic either."

"All right, you two morons," Margaret said, drawing her guns and aiming one at each of them. "Both of you shut up and freeze. We're taking Dave and we're going now."

"You're too late," Steve said. "We're done."

Roger had been watching Dave, and he realized that the area inside the pentagram was getting darker. The candles that he had thought were unlit were actually giving off a smoky black substance which was filling the pentagram, hiding Dave in the mist.

Margaret saw this as well. "What's going on? Roger, stop it!"

"I'm really not sure how," Roger said, slowly approaching the pentagram. Now he really wished he had brought Fluffy. He had no idea what was happening or how to stop it, but he knew better than to interrupt a spell in progress; the results could be disastrous both for Dave and everyone in the vicinity. Chester had no such compunctions, though, and he ran into the pentagram, knocking over one of the candles lit with actual fire. It rolled into the pentagram, and both Chester and candle disappeared inside the black mist.

"Roger!" Margaret said, keeping her guns trained on the two Satanists who had started this.

Well, now that Chester had already begun it, it couldn't hurt to finish the job. Roger began grabbing candles, lit with both fire and darkness, and tossing them aside. One of them hit Steve in the nose.

"Ouch! Are you crazy?" Steve shouted. "You could cause the spell to blow up!"

"Yes, you and that cat are going to cause a cat-astrophe," Waldo said.

With all the candles gone, the darkness began to clear, revealing the figures hidden by it. When Margaret saw what was there, she strode across the room and placed one of her pistols under Steve's chin, all the while keeping the other one trained on Waldo. "What the Hell did you do!" she said through gritted teeth.

"That wasn't supposed to happen! I swear!" Steve said.

"Aboobsolutely not!" agreed Waldo.

Lying in the pentagram spread-eagled was a girl. Where Dave had been wearing jeans and a light blue shirt, she wore a short denim skirt and a light blue sweater, both exactly the same shade as what Dave had worn. Worse, she looked like Dave—the same hair color, the same general shape to the face. But the hair was too long, with two small braids at the shoulders, and the rest of the body was obviously female. Chester sat near her head, licking her face, but she didn't respond.

"Oh boy," Roger said. "Well, maybe not."


This is the first 2,171 words of a 17.472 word story.

Saturday, March 1, 2008

Something Inside
I decided to write something short for the Storyblogging Carnival. This is what I came up with. Sometimes I worry about myself.


I’ve told this story so many times, that you’d think I’d have it memorized. To the EMTs, to the police, to the lawyer, to the judge, to the shrinks. Over and over again, and each time it’s just as new and different as it was before. It never comes out the same way twice, never makes sense. The other lawyer said it was proof that I was lying, although the shrinks say it’s proof that I’m suffering from some sort of trauma. Well, maybe. It was traumatic, all right, but that doesn’t make it any less real. The reason my story doesn’t make sense is that the events didn’t make sense, and every time they ask me questions which are supposed to make it make sense, it comes out different. And the only thing that is the same each time is that Chuck is dead and the thing that killed him left something inside of me. Something. I don’t know what it is, just that the thing touched my chest and I could feel that something climbing into me. I still feel it. The doctors tell me that there’s nothing there, but they’re wrong. Not only is it there, but it’s moving. It’s alive. They won’t let me have anything sharp anymore, but I can’t get to it with my fingernails. I just have a raw and bloody patch in the middle of my chest. The shrinks have been trying to convince me that I killed Chuck, and that the thing I saw is just my imagination. Or a “manifestation of the violence inside me.” I’d much rather just be a murderer than have to live with this thing inside of me. Well, I won’t have to worry about that for much longer. The thing inside has started to migrate towards my head. I think that once it gets there, I won’t be worried about anything at all.


This has been a 318 word story.

Wednesday, January 30, 2008

The Office of Second Chances
This is more a concept for a story than an actual story, but I really liked the idea when it struck me. So here's the intro.


As everyone knows, the world is always in danger. Anyone who watches television can tell you that mad scientists, evil overlords, alien invaders, and ancient monstrosities attempt to destroy it every other week. This is why heroes are necessary in the first place, but there are times when even they fail. Sometimes the plucky comic relief isn’t plucky enough, the wise old mentor isn’t that wise, the cryptic clues are too cryptic, or the ragtag band of heroes just can’t manage to overcome their differences. For whatever reason, the naïve farmboys, the cynical loners, and the beautiful princesses, even with the help of their bumbling sidekicks, just don’t have the wit, the courage, and the power needed to save the world. Considering that the odds are always against them, it’s inevitable that probability will eventually catch up. In that case, the world is indeed destroyed. Six thousand, seven hundred, and twelve times at last count.

There’s a proper time for the end of the world, and woe on those who let it happen ahead of schedule. Fortunately, in the Department of World Saving in the Bureau of Heroism, there’s the Office of Second Chances. When things go wrong and the world ends prematurely, it’s up to them to fix it. As soon as they’re done assigning blame.


It seems like it could make a fun story to me. The problem is that when I started writing, it came out as people in an office talking, which, let's face it, isn't all that interesting unless you can do really snappy dialogue. While I can sometimes do good dialogue, what I ended up with just wasn't up to the task. One world-weary bureaucrat bemoaning the paperwork involved to another just didn't make a great story, even if the topic of conversation was surreal.

I realized today what I actually did need to make it work: a character who doesn't fit in this office environment. I need to tell this story from the perspective of the failed hero, who has sacrificed and fought to save the world only to watch it end, and suddenly finds himself being interviewed by a bored paper-pusher asking him to file his claim and checking to see if his hero insurance covers the end of the world. That, I think, would work. And it lets me write some action scenes.

This has been the first 226 words of a continuing story rated G.

Saturday, October 20, 2007

The History of the Domini: Part V
The Rest of the Story: The rest of The History of the Domini can be found here.

This is the fourth part of Randall Aurelius's unpublished draft of The History of the Domini.


The History of the Domini
by Randall Aurelius


Part V: The Imprisonment

By this time, the forces arrayed against one another were, if not exactly even, more closely matched than ever before. While the Malwer were more powerful in magic, the Shades and the Amaranthine wizards were, between them, more numerous. And while the Orcs and goblins outnumbered the Amaranthine and Human armies, the leadership of the First Legion made them a more effective fighting force than their numbers suggested. Thus, the balance between the two sides teetered precariously for a number of years, and eventually, the Humans and their Amaranthine allies gained the upper hand. The Orcs were scattered, and the Malwer forced to retreat. They gathered in their capital city, and the Human and Amaranthine forces gathered around it. They knew the powerful magic which the Malwer yielded, and likewise knew that an attempt to take the city would cost countless lives. So instead, they decided to leave the Malwer where they were. For the second and final time in our history, the Shades and the Amaranthine combined their magics, and they wove a barrier to completely enclose the Malwer city. By the time the Malwer realized what we were doing and struck back, they were too late. The prison was complete, and the Malwer were trapped inside their city.

Not all the Malwer were caught in this trap. Some were outside the city at the time, some managed to flee before the trap could close. The Shades and the Amaranthine spent years tracking down those who had escaped. While that was being done, the armies which had been gathered against the Malwer dispersed. Humans began to build their own towns and cities. And when the last of the Malwer had been captured, the Shades themselves began to go their separate ways, while the Amaranthine retreated to live in isolation from the Humans.

But while the Malwer were gone, peace was short lived.


This has been the latest 313 words of a 2,844 word continuing short story.

Saturday, September 29, 2007

The History of the Domini: Part IV
The Rest of the Story: The rest of The History of the Domini can be found here.

This is the fourth part of Randall Aurelius's unpublished draft of The History of the Domini.


The History of the Domini
by Randall Aurelius


Part IV: The First Legion

The details of the magic involved in the calling of the First Legion are long forgotten. We do know that it was the first of only two times that the disparate magics of the Shades and the Amaranthine were combined. The Circuit involved hundreds of magic-users, and many of them died in the effort. But when it was done, an army had been summoned to our aid.

From where they were summoned is still a mystery. The First Legion neither spoke our language, nor understood what we wanted from them. They were angry at being ripped from their own land, but terrified of the magic we wielded. With great difficulty, we found a way to communicate. From what we were able to learn, they came from a land similar to ours in many ways, but there they had no contact with Orcs or Goblins or Malwer. Instead humans warred upon each other for control of the land and the sea. It is difficult to understand now how strange that was to us then, humans fighting wars against each other. We were far from a peaceful people even then, but we had no understanding of conflict on such a scale. The First Legion did, and we needed that understanding. After a great deal of bargaining, with threats on both sides, we were able to reach an agreement.

The numbers which the First Legion added to humanity’s beleaguered forces were small, but the expertise was considerable. They were among the best trained and most disciplined soldiers in their land, and they shared their training and experience with us, first strengthening our defenses against the Orcs and Goblins, and then leading the assault to drive back the invaders. Unprepared as they were to face competent warriors, the Orcish advance faltered and then collapsed, and their conquests were quickly retaken. Emboldened by our successes, we pursued the Orcs and Goblins as they retreated, and may have succeeded in eliminating both races entirely, had not the Malwer themselves taken the field.



This is the latest 336 words of a 2,531 word short story in progress.

Wednesday, September 12, 2007

Artura, an excerpt from Water
It occurred to me that this Storyblogging Carnival is our third anniversary. It's been a long time since I've submitted a story to the Carnival, but I figured for the anniversary edition I ought to include something (especially as we only got one story in our first round of submissions). What I've been working on recently is Water, the "sequel" to Fire. It's not really a sequel, though, only the second part of the book of which Fire is part one. I don't intend to publish Water online, so that leaves me in a bit of a quandary, since I don't have any other stories to share. After some thought, I decided that I could publish a small excerpt from Water. I considered putting up something from the first chapter, but the first chapter's pretty boring. I intend to get rid of it and write something better in its place. So instead I'll give you an excerpt from a chapter near the end, a bit of which I posted before. This particular scene pretty much stands alone, but it works better if you know something about Aulus. He's the clever and paranoid older brother of Victor and Lucia. If you want more than that, I'm afraid you'll have to read Fire, which is freely available on my Writings page. This chapter is the first time I reveal what he's up to, or tell any part of the story from his perspective. It was a bit of a challenge, making his character distinct from all my other characters. From the outside, it's easy--he's the paranoid one. But making him an interesting character, showing how the world makes sense from his perspective, and making him seem at least half-way likable without changing his personality: that was a challenge. Anyway, here it is. First, though, a quick warning. The subject matter deserves an R rating.


Chapter 17
Artura


Aulus adjusted the rough leather cap on his head. Its somewhat conical shape was rounded off well before it peaked, and proclaimed to the world that he was a freedman. It lied, of course, but while Aulus always sought the truth, he felt no compunction to share it. Right now, he was more concerned with the physical discomfort it caused him than any message it might be sending to the rest of the world. It was hot here, and his sweat damp hair itched even worse than the rest of his body, chafed as it was by the rough wool tunic he wore. Face it, Aulus, you’re just too used to living in comfort, he thought. His stomach growled, reminding him of how little comfort his current job provided. Fortunately, it was evening, and the oppressive heat was slowly fading as Aulus headed home for the night. Occasionally a cool, salt-scented breeze from the north would caress the back of his neck and nearly take the cap off his head.

He scratched at his head underneath the cap, careful not to dislodge it. A freedman not wearing his cap could be arrested for passing himself off as a citizen. Some of the Urban Legionaries were petty enough that they would make the arrest even on the poor freedman who merely dropped his cap, and some citizens were simply looking for an excuse to beat a frail-looking freedman. Aulus detested bullies of both types, and while he usually managed to avoid their notice, there was no point in taking risks.

The long shadows cast by the disappearing sun cast their darkness on his as he navigated the raised stepping stones that gave pedestrians some hope of staying out of the muck covering the paved streets. Buildings loomed several stories high on either side of him, and it was already late enough to leave some of the particularly narrow stretches, where the overhanging buildings nearly hid the sun at high noon, in deep shadow. Aulus wished that Artura had the same system of street lamps as Novaro, but only a few private homes had lamps, and those were only lit in anticipation of the return of the patricrian master and mistress of the house. No one wanted to waste lamplight on those wretched strangers still out as evening set in.

Aulus had to move quickly to the side as one of those wealthy patricians came by. Slaves carrying torches took the lead, followed by a tight knot of burly slaves with clubs around a litter, heavy velvet curtains blocking out the sights and sounds of the street. Not the smells, I bet, Aulus thought. Just then the overpowering perfume which served that purpose swept over him, its sick sweetness causing him to break out in a loud coughing fit. One of the thugs who guarded the litter glared at him, taking a step in his direction. Fortunately, the litter was moving too fas to give him a chance to indulge in a little violence, and he had to hurry after it as the rear torchbearers caught up to him. Aulus barely had time to breathe a sigh of relief when he heard the screaming.

Loud shouting was not uncommon in Artura. Usually they were cries of anger or passion which could be safely ignored. This was more; Aulus could tell by the continuous nature of the cries. From the sound of it, it had been going on for several moments already, when it had been drowned out by the tramping feet of the entourage. The cries were also unmistakably feminine.

Aulus continued walking forward, which unfortunately was in the direction of the screaming woman. He wasn’t here to play hero. He had a job to do, a job which was much more important than some woman being mugged or raped or murdered. If he were in a litter surrounded by armed guards, he’d have them help out, of course. Assuming I even heard it through the curtain. His pace had picked up, and he was heading for the commotion faster than he should. It’s so much easier when you don’t know about these things, he thought. When you can just shrug your shoulders and say, "Well, these things happen in a large city, there’s nothing you can do." He was jogging now, his breath coming faster but hardly winded. If I had come this way ten minutes earlier or later, or if I had come another way. I could go another way now, but I am not going to be frightened off by this. Now his breath was coming in quick bursts, and his steps were flying over the ground. The straps of his sandals bit painfully as his feet scraped and snagged on the raised stepping stones, on loose paving stones, on softer objects he’d rather not think about and wished he didn’t smell. He nearly sprinted past the alley where all the screaming was occurring before he realized he had arrived. His chest heaved, his breath whistling in his chest. His eyes were blurred and in the darkness it was impossible to tell what he was seeing at first.

A large man, dressed in the leather cuirass and kilt of one of the Urban Legionaries, leaned over a woman. The woman wore a tunic that bore no resemblance to a proper dress, well short of her knees and slit open on one side. It was torn open at the breast, although Aulus could tell that had taken very little effort given the depth of the neckline. Her face was painted to a white too pale to approximate skin tone, with lips too red and eyes too dark with makeup. Her hair hung loose, falling well down her back. She was clearly a prostitute, and not an expensive one; she was probably a freedwoman, although they didn’t wear caps to mark themselves as the men did. The soldier was too large for his armor, the straps straining at the bulk, rolls of fat spilling between them. His puffy face leered, eyes fastened on the woman’s bare breast. One of his hands clutched a handful of her hair. Her hands were wrapped around his other arm, whose hand held tightly to her bare breast. It squeezed and she screamed, in pain and outrage and... shame? It couldn’t be: she was a prostitute.

This is none of my business. She was a prostitute. Why was it any of Aulus’s concern if a customer didn’t want to pay, if he was a little rough? The legionary squeezed again and she screamed again; Aulus winced. This wouldn’t be my business if she were a patrician matron about to be raped by her slave. Neither of them had seen him yet, and he didn’t think they would see him unless he wanted them to. For all they know, I’m not even here. She screamed again, countertimed to his squeezing, and the brute laughed, giggled really, uncharacteristically high-pitched for his girth. All I want to do is go home and have dinner. I wish I wasn’t here.

He heard the tramping of feet as another entourage neared the alley, and Aulus turned to look. Torchlight licked down the alley, and the torchbearers came into sight. They were craning their necks, looking for the source of the noise they had heard. Aulus heard a sob behind him. The litter hove into view with its guards. They too watched, some troubled, some leering, some indifferent to anything that wasn’t a direct threat to their charge. It was hard to tell the color of the litter in the torchlight, just that it was a dark color, maybe a deep blue or green. “Help me!” he heard. A hand emerged from the litter, and Aulus let himself feel relief for the first time. Someone else would deal with this. Someone else would help this woman and relieve him of the responsibility. The long, soft hand, its bejeweled fingers scattering the inconstant torchlight, waved preemptorily to the litterbearers, and Aulus knew what would happen even before he heard the sharp, frightened word emerge from behind the curtains, “Hurry!” The litterbearers picked up the pace, and the guards, some disappointed and some relieved, moved with it. Aulus turned back to the tableau before him, which stood unchanged.

Torchlight flickered down the alley again, touching rapist and victim, who watched the procession pass. The man seemed to hold his breath, while the woman sobbed almost quietly now. Still, she watched them pass through her tears, and the soldier watched with her. Aulus stood backlit by the procession; he should be clearly visible to them, he was clearly visible, only they still didn’t know he was there. They wouldn’t notice him until he wanted them to. He still had only the vaguest idea how he could so easily slip beneath people’s notice, and it didn’t always work, but when it did, it was like magic. The rear torchbearers were passing now, and for the first time the light shined clearly down the alley, and he could make out the details concealed in shadows. The man’s eyes were clouded, his face slack, his nose and cheeks florid. Clearly he had had plenty to drink, today and a thousand days previous. Tears ran down the woman’s face, tracking through black, white, and red makeup to leave an unholy mess. But underneath the skin was pale and freckled, not the olive of the southerners. The eyes, shining and wet, reflected the torches with their own green fire, and the hair shone with a deep, rich red.

Jaelin? It couldn’t be Jaelin. Jaelin was safely with Grandfather, hundreds of miles south of here. And she still thinks she’s Lucia, at least according to the latest letter. He was moving forward, alone, unarmed, and still unseen. She wouldn’t be here, not dressed like that, not working as a prostitute. Aulus looked around for a weapon: a rock, a large stick, anything that would narrow the soldier’s advantage. His eyes fell to the sword hanging from his enemy’s belt.

Damn, I’m thinking of him as my enemy now. I do not want to get involved in this. He stood beside the man, who, figuring himself free from any interruptions, leaned in toward his victim for an obscene kiss. Aulus reached for the sword, wrapped his hand about it--Please don’t notice me now!--and pulled.

The hand which had been groping the woman’s breast whipped back to seize hold of the sword’s hilt, but since Aulus had already pulled it halfway out of its scabbard, the hand grasped hold of the blade instead. The soldier was looking at Aulus now, seeing him for the first time, his expression equal parts shock and fear, which turned to simple pain as Aulus yanked the sword the rest of the way from its scabbard, slicing the soldier’s hand open in the process. The man was the one who screamed this time, but the woman cried out too as he turned to face Aulus, his left hand, still caught in her hair, jerking her along with him. Aulus had never been a swordsman to match Marcus, or even Gaius, but his older brothers had forced him to participate in enough sparring lessons that he knew how to use a sword. He held the short blade left-handed now, pressing its point against the Urban Legionary’s throat. It was something of a reach, since the man was head and shoulders taller than Aulus, but Aulus could still push the point home. He didn’t dare spare a glance for the woman to see how she was taking this, although it seemed to him that she held very still.

The would-be rapist blinked at him. “Where di’ ya...?” He swayed and blinked a few more times, and Aulus could see the beginnings of anger pushing aside the fear. “A free’man? Whacha thin’ yer doin’ assaultin’ one of the Ur’an Co-cohor’?”

Aulus could smell the alcohol on his breath, so strong that he wasn’t certain what drink had contained it. Probably the sour wine the soldiers drank. This one hadn’t watered his down properly. “I’m stopping a rape.”

“Yer assaultin’ me,” he said. “Dis is assaul’. You coul’ be cru-cruci...fied for dis.”

Idiot. I could have you crucified. That wasn’t strictly true. Citizens, of which august assembly this soldier was indubitably an unworthy member, could not be crucified. Aulus could probably have him executed, but not by crucifixion. Unfortunately, doing so would cost him the disguise he had worked so hard to set up, so it was probably not the wisest idea.

“Are you saying that the smart thing for me would be to kill you now?” Aulus asked. “Because I could do that.” Could I? he asked himself. Maybe, he thought, glancing at the woman.

In retrospect, that was probably a mistake. Aulus never knew whether the thug had caught the bluff in his voice, or he had seen his distraction, or his anger had simply overcome his fear. He batted the sword aside with his already bleeding hand, and before Aulus could bring it back, his left hand, which had somehow managed to free itself from the woman’s hair, grabbed hold of Aulus’s wrist and twisted it. His hand convulsed, and the sword hilt slid from his fingers to clatter against the ground. Aulus kicked it aside before the thug could reach it, right to the woman’s feet. Aulus didn’t see what happened to it then, because the soldier gave him a shove which sent him five feet down the alleyway and onto his back, his cap flying from his head right before it cracked against the paving stone with a force that set his ears ringing. His eyes cleared just in time to see a shapely shadow leap over his face. He turned his head to see the woman running into the street, sword in one hand and the other clutched to her breast, holding the remains of her dress together. Aulus lifted his head to look at the guard, who blinked stupidly after the fleeing woman, a dangerous expression on his face. He took a step in her direction.

Aulus came to his feet as quickly as his painfully spinning head would allow. Maybe the drunk soldier wouldn’t pursue, maybe he couldn’t catch her, maybe she could fend him off with the sword. Aulus could vanish again, slip away. Maybe he had done enough. Maybe... He stepped between the soldier and his quarry. He had no weapon, and he hoped the soldier was unarmed as well. It made little difference: the man was three times his size, and although he was fat and drunk, Aulus had reason to know he was fast. Aulus knew he couldn’t win this fight, and the soldier had good reason to want him dead. Sometimes all you could do was stand in the enemy’s way, take the beating given, and hope that was enough. And hope I survive in the process.

Aulus would have liked to say he gave as good as he got, but that would have been a lie. The man was armored, for Jove’s sake! His last conscious thought, as repeated blows crushed his narrow chest against the wall, was surprisingly plaintive: She wasn’t Jaelin after all.


This is a 2,549 word excerpt from a 190,000 word novel.

Saturday, October 21, 2006

The History of the Domini: Part III
The Rest of the Story: The rest of The History of the Domini can be found here.

This is the third part of Randall Aurelius's unpublished draft of The History of the Domini. Randall did his best to be honest in his portrayal of all involved. Thus he avoided showing the humans or the Shades in too favorable a light. Indeed, that our entire history revolves around those who decided to run rather than fight in the earliest days is something that many Domini do their best to gloss over.


The History of the Domini
by Randall Aurelius


Part III: The Amaranthine

To humans, a hundred years is three to four generations. Events that happened that far back are no more than legends to people without written histories. To the Malwer, it was just enough time to prepare the means to avenge themselves on their escaped slaves. By that time, the humans who had fled the Malwer had lost all contact with those who remained behind to fight. The communication had slowed to a trickle over the years, stories of a distant war that most of the newly free humans did not believe was worth fighting. When it finally stopped, there was some worry, but a few years passed and the worries ceased.

The free humans were focused on the business of surviving and building farms and communities in the previously uninhabited land rather than on the distant, mostly forgotten threat of the Malwer. The Shades among them were likewise occupied with building their cloistered communities and finding recruits among the other humans. Over time, methods of recruiting were developed to take young men with the ability while minimizing the trauma to him or his community, but in the process the Shades became more and more isolated from the rest of humanity. Some preferred reclusiveness, while others used their power to try to force people to serve them. Occasionally, Shade communities of differing philosophies would clash, but these were mere skirmishes compared to the later wars.

The Malwer would have overwhelmed humanity when they finally came upon them in force, if not for the Amaranthine. The Amaranthine are nearly as great a mystery as the Malwer. They lacked the Malwer’s ability with magic (although there were a few among them, called wizards, who had powerful magical abilities), but they were similarly long-lived, and they knew a great deal about the Malwer, whom they held a bitter grudge against for unknown reasons. They looked nearly human, although with odd coloring and strange characteristics. Many today say they were related to the Kawyr, although they regarded humans with more sympathy than the cold Kawyr ever could. When the Amaranthine first came, warning that the Malwer were coming with a large force of creatures which no one had ever heard of, no one knew what to make of them, including the Shades. Just a few messengers came at first, but soon it became clear that there was a mass migration of the Amaranthine, women and children along with men, fleeing from something. Although many took their warnings seriously, a few saw them as interlopers. The Shades themselves were divided, and many of the communities forbade the Amaranthine from entering areas under their control. There were a few skirmishes, but no widespread conflict, and eventually the Amaranthine settled just outside the human areas. They continued to warn of brutish, violent creatures behind them, but the humans saw no reason to take their warnings seriously, until the Orcs came.

There were, in fact, creatures of two types in the initial invasion: Orcs and Goblins. Orcs are roughly as tall as humans, but more muscular. While most of them are not very intelligent, the commanders of their armies are as smart as we are. There were no warlocks or witches among them at this time. Goblins are smaller, uglier, and stupider. The humans had little chance against the invaders. In the hundred years they had been free, there had been no wars more serious than a skirmish, and no human community had formed anything resembling an army. The Shades fared little better. They too had only skirmished, and they had developed little magic capable of facing armies. While the goblins were less an army than an unruly mob, forced to fight by their Orc masters, the Orcs showed a surprising grasp of tactics and strategy, even though their forces were lacking in discipline. And if what the Amaranthine said was true, the Malwer were the ones truly behind the attack. They had recruited the Orcs to carry out their vengeance on the humans.

Fortunately for the humans, the Amaranthine had been fighting Orcs for years, and they lent their aid against them. It was not enough, though, as the Amaranthine were few in number, and their wizards were even fewer. Humanity was forced to retreat from their attackers, driven towards the sea in a narrowing strip of land as the Orcs laid claim to the countryside. In desperation, the Shades and the wizards pooled their abilities, and performed an act of magic unlike any seen before or since. They called the First Legion.


This is the latest 755 words of a 2,195 word short story in progress.

Thursday, September 21, 2006

The History of the Domini: Part II
The Rest of the Story: The rest of The History of the Domini can be found here.

This is the second part of Randall Aurelius's unpublished draft of The History of the Domini. Randall's work may seem brief to those familiar with the lengthy works of the Philosophers, but this is a result of his deliberate care rather than a lack thereof. Rumors and legends concerning the early days of the Domini were plentiful when Randall first wrote this history. Randall forswore writing the more unreliable stories, and did his best to only relate what was solidly known or at least reasonably surmised. It is only due to his great care that his work came as close to an accurate recounting as it did.


The History of the Domini
by Randall Aurelius


Part II: The Exodus

The Shades and the other slaves who had joined them were far from unified. The Shades themselves were divided. Their structure as a loose network of independent cells had protected them from the Malwer’s ferocious hunt, but left them with no hierarchy or leadership. There was fierce infighting, especially between those who had participated in the Malwer-hunting, and those who believed it to be as bad as anything the Malwer had done. Many wanted to fight against the Malwer and free all the humans from their grasp, while others thought that those who had now escaped should flee beyond the reach of their former masters. The mundane humans overwhelmingly wanted to flee.

In the end, the Shades split. About half remained behind to fight, joined by a few humans who hated their Malwer masters worse than the Shades. The remaining quarter led the vast majority of the humans to try to find a land far from the Malwer’s rule. They headed north, to warmer climes.

If the Shades expected the people to be grateful, there were sorely mistaken. Most of the former slaves blamed the Shades for the situation they were in, and they all feared their power. They shunned the Shades, and even the Shades’ own families wanted nothing to do with brothers, sons, and husbands who had been inducted. They were wise to do so, since, while the people were too afraid of the Shades to threaten them directly, they harassed and in some cases even harmed their families. The Shades soon discovered that they had as much need to protect their identities from their fellow humans as from the Malwer. The fear and resentment of the Shades even extended to those with the ability to learn, once it was discovered that there were many untrained humans among the exiles.

The Shades made several decisions during this time that has continued to shape the Order to this day. Only young men were taken to be trained, lest they take fathers and husbands from their families. They were taken in secret, so that there would be no reprisals against their families, and they were required to make a clean break with their old lives, as any contact put their acquaintances at risk. Not all the young men were willing, but they understood that once it was discovered they had the ability, they were outcasts. Finally, women were not taken. There were fewer women than men among the escaped slaves, and the Shades realized that the long-term survival of the independent humans would require children. They also worried that if they recruited women with the ability, they might deplete the number of boys with it in future generations. It should also be remembered that in these ancient days that the egalitarian impulses which are rare outside of the Philosophers even now was practically unheard of. The Shades saw themselves as warriors, and they did not believe that women were suited for their task.

Eventually, the independent humans moved beyond the reach of the Malwer Sovereignty, and settled in a land to the west of it, likely where the Novar Empire is now. Information trickled to them from the Shades and the humans who had remained behind to fight. While these warriors had been wholly unsuccessful in a direct assault, they still managed to cause difficulty for the Malwer, and to assist many among the remaining slaves who wished to escape. Meanwhile, the exodus of slaves had triggered internal turmoil among the Malwer, and the infighting would keep them occupied for years to come.


This is the latest 597 words of a 1,440 word short story in progress.

Tuesday, September 5, 2006

The History of the Domini: Part I
This previously unpublished work is an excerpt from an early draft of Randall Aurelius's History of the Domini. Revelations which occurred a few short years later invalidated much of what Aurelius had written, and cast a new light on the rest. This work is more than a historical curiosity, however. It reveals the inner workings of the Ordo Dominorum's self-image at the time, what they understood of their origins and their purpose, even if much of it was vague legend rather than complete fact. Thus, it helps us to understand their motivations and the reasons they behaved the way they did during the recent crisis. It would be wise of us to take that into account before we pass judgement on them.


The History of the Domini
by Randall Aurelius


Part I: The Malwer

Any history of the Domini must begin with the Malwer. Unfortunately, so little is known about the Malwer that every history of the Domini is, of necessity, incomplete. Nevertheless, I will endeavor to record what is known of our origins, and hope that someday the blanks may be filled.

Who, or what, the Malwer were is the great mystery of our origins. Today, the uninitiated refer to them as demons, but in the days of our enslavement we considered them gods. At a time before humans had any magic, every Malwer was gifted with it. It came to them as naturally as breathing, and they viewed their magic as the proof of their right to rule mankind.

Our tradition calls the first human to discover magic Saul. This is almost certainly not his name, and his identity is as much a mystery as how he discovered magic. Human magic only comes through training: to this date there is no verified case of any human developing this ability spontaneously or through his own meditation. It is as ludicrous as gnats forming spontaneously from dust or frogs from mud (a belief still held by many of the superstitious Novari). Many have speculated that Saul must have been taught, either by a renegade Malwer or, more plausibly, by one of the Amaranthine, although this was centuries before they revealed themselves to the rest of the human race.

Whatever the source of his power, Saul knew that magic might be the key to humanity’s freedom. However, he also knew that he did not have the ability to challenge the Malwer on his own, so he could not risk discovery by the Malwer. Saul was most likely a field slave, with little enough contact with the Malwer to avoid their suspicion. Even so, he proceeded with the greatest of caution. He found others with untrained magical ability and taught them, all the while keeping his identity hidden from his students as much as anyone else, wrapping himself in an encompassing robe every time he met with them. He knew that if any one of them were discovered, the only chance he and the rest of his students would have for survival was anonymity. His students did the same, perhaps hiding their identities even from one another. Eventually, his students grew knowledgeable enough to train students of their own, maintaining the practice of keeping their identities hidden from their own students.

The teaching spread throughout the Malwer lands, and somehow they avoided discovery for several generations, most likely because they confined themselves to teaching fellow field slaves, who had little Malwer supervision, and because they did nothing but teach and learn. While the masters continued to keep the students from discovering their own identities, some cells allowed the students to know each others’ identities. This became the only means for cells to contact one another once age claimed the former master of the current cell leaders. Even so, after a few generations, the secrecy had taken its toll and most cells had no contact with anyone removed by a generation or two. It is not clear whether the teachings were confined to men deliberately at first: it may simply have been that there were more men than women among the field slaves. It is certain that those learning magic were exclusively male by the time they took the next step, perhaps for the same reason that all soldiers are men.

It was unlikely a concerted decision, as it has already been noted that most cells had contact with only a few others. But at some point the cells began acting against the Malwer. Rather than a head-to-head war, a cell would track down and kill an individual Malwer, generally one against they held some particular grudge. Other cells, hearing of the rumors, began to do the same, and soon the Malwer found themselves being hunted and killed by an elusive enemy they could not identify. When they were spotted, by either Malwer or human, hidden in their all-concealing voluminous robes and no doubt further obscured by magical illusion, they appeared as shapeless black shadows. Thus they earned the name Shades.

For a while, the Malwer feared the Shades, and whispered that they were ghosts or demons, but no conspiracy can continue forever, and eventually the Shades were found out. At the realization that the Shades were humans with magic, fear and fury alike swept through the Malwer, and a hunt began to find the Shades and exterminate them. As an extra dead slave here or there did not concern them, they did not burden themselves with proof that a human was indeed a Shade before executing him. This hunt forced the Shades to flee. Many innocent humans fled with them, fearing the Malwer who had turned on them, although many blamed the Shades for bringing this oppression on top of them. For the first time, Shades gathered together in large numbers to fight the Malwer openly, joined by desperate humans. Thus the rebellion had begun.


This is the first 843 words of a continuing story. There will be more.

Wednesday, June 28, 2006

Coming Home, the Prologue to The Eyes of the Shadow
I haven't been participating regularly in the Storyblogging Carnival for a long while. Instead, I've been focused on revising The Eyes of the Shadow, previously known as Eyes in the Shadow, which can be found here. It's been growing from novella-length to full novel length, with lots of details which I didn't previously know coming out and being incorportated into the story. The general strand of the story has remained unchanged, but some history, and hints at the all-important question of "Why?" are starting to emerge. So, while I'm on vacation, which in actuality is more of a Writing vacation, giving me time to write out the last few pieces to complete the greatly expanded version of Eyes, I figured I'd share a little of what I've been working on. This submission is the new prologue of The Eyes of the Shadow, and gives a small glimpse at Ryan's messed up childhood.


Prologue
Coming Home


Ryan took the bus home from Providence Middle School that day, with no after-school activities to keep him late, no science club or math club. He had no other activities that night, either, no karate practice or tutoring clients. He planned to do his homework and then read a book, maybe watch a little television. When the bus let him off at the stop sign, just a few houses down from his place, he headed for home straightaway. The sun was shining, and he enjoyed its warmth on his face, but the gnats which followed ensured he wouldn’t be spending much time outside. Some of the neighborhood kids would probably get a game of softball going, but Ryan wasn’t planning on participating. Aside from karate, which was very much an exercise in self-discipline rather than teamwork and competition, he wasn’t into sports, and while he was friendly with the other kids, he wasn’t really friends with them. They’d all known each other for years, while he’d only been here a few months. He didn’t make friends quickly or easily, and given how frequently his family moved, it had been a long time since he’d had a real friend.

Eleven twenty-six was affixed in large metal numerals right beside the white door at the front of the two story yellow house. Ryan reached into one jean pocket, then checked the other, before finding the loose key. Since it was his one and only key, he didn’t bother with a keychain. He already had the key in hand when he realized that the front door was open.

There was no car in the driveway, and they had yet to clear all the boxes out of the garage, so there could be no car hidden in there. Still, he shoved the key into his pocket as he pushed open the door. “Mom? Dad? I’m home.” There was no response. Not even their dog, a black and white English Springer Spaniel named Dozer, appeared, and he always came running when someone entered the house. Of course, Dozer was usually aimed for the front door, trying to get out. He loved to get outside on his own, and he loved it even more when someone chased him. He’d stay just out of reach, running a bit farther whenever his pursuer got close, then turn around and wait, tongue lolling out of his panting mouth, looking for all the world like he was grinning at you. Usually the best thing to do was just to let him run loose. He’d come back whining at the door eventually. If the door was open, then most likely Dozer had already run off, and he wouldn’t be back before dark unless Ryan went looking for him. The more important question was why the door was open in the first place.

Closing the door behind him, Ryan moved deeper into the house. “Hello?” he called. He did a quick circuit of the first floor—living room, dining room, kitchen, den, and half-bath. So far, no one. He even opened the garage door, but there was no one and no car, only piles of still packed boxes from the last move. They looked even more disorganized than he remembered them, and a few of them were open with some books and other odds and ends sitting beside them. He closed the door and went upstairs.

The three bedrooms were more than his small family needed, so his father had made one of them into a study. Ryan’s own room was unoccupied, as was the master bedroom, but he saw that someone had left one of his father’s dresser drawers open. A quick glance showed nothing besides socks and underwear inside, and not too much of those. It must be time to do laundry. The study was undisturbed.

Ryan was beginning to feel uneasy. He distinctly remembered locking the door when he had been the last one to leave in the morning. If his parents had returned for some reason, they wouldn’t have left the door open when they went. They could hardly miss Dozer sprinting out the door as they left. The only other possibility which was occurring to him was that someone had broken in. Intruders usually avoided houses with dogs, but it’s not like Dozer would have done more than sniff at him before bolting out the door. If someone had invaded his home, what had he done? Riffle through his father’s sock drawer? Unpack a couple of boxes? Ryan hadn’t noticed anything missing. If it was an intruder, had Ryan scared him off? Or was he still here somewhere?

Ryan returned to the master bedroom with some trepidation. He was probably being silly. Just because the door was open didn’t mean some thief had broken into his home. Silly or not, he wasn’t taking any chances. He went straight to his father’s walk-in closet and turned on the light, carefully looking over all the shirts, pants, and jackets to make sure no one was there. The clothes were just sparse enough that there was no space where someone could be hidden, which struck him as unusual, as the closet was normally stuffed. And weren’t the suitcases usually sitting in that corner? Well, there was no time to worry about it now. Satisfied that no one was hiding in the closet, he pushed aside some winter coats. Where was it? It should be here… ah. It was lying among the winter boots, tossed carelessly on top of them. He pulled the flat leather sheathe free. The leather was decorated with ornate symbols, a stylized sunburst among scrollwork, and hung with tassels. It looked fancy, but he knew it was just a gimmicky exterior to lure tourists. He was pretty sure his father had gotten it in Mexico. It wasn’t a real weapon. The machete was too dull and too old to do much damage to anything besides weeds, and having tried its edge against said vegetation, Ryan could testify that it wasn’t much good against that either. Still, he grabbed the black plastic handle and pulled it free. The wide, flat blade was patterned with both dark and light stains, some of which were probably rust. Still, it was better than nothing.

Feeling slightly more secure with the blade in his hand, Ryan next checked the master bath, then his mother’s walk-in closet. Nothing and no one to be found, though he’d had to push aside a lot of soft fabric to be certain. He rechecked his own bedroom and his own small closet, then the study, then the bathroom. All clear. Now it was time to go back downstairs. He switched the machete to his left so he could wipe the sweat from his right hand on his jeans. He felt ridiculous holding this cheap, weed-whacking sword. If he came upon his mother or father while waving this thing around, he was going to be dreadfully embarrassed. He’d be even more embarrassed if he went running out of his house and called the police from a neighbor’s only to find that he’d been chased out by his own imagination. That left going through the house himself, just to be sure, and hoping that his fears were as groundless as he thought they were.

Ryan searched the first floor again, this time looking in every corner and opening every closet: half-bath, living room, dining room, and kitchen. He didn’t call out, as he didn’t want to give himself away if there was someone who shouldn’t be there. Everything looked to be as it should be. When he got to the den, he looked carefully for any signs of disturbance. It looked like a wrecking crew had been through, with magazines burying the coffee table and spilling to the floor, laundry on the couch, tapes scattered in front of the stereo and video tapes in front of the VCR. The vertical blinds in front of the sliding glass doors were twisted and bent out of shape. All of which meant that the den looked like it always did, and none of the holy trinity of valuable electronics—the stereo, VCR, and television—were missing. Any thief would have been welcome to the wallpaper. The orange, yellow, and gray clouds with silver lining were almost as atrocious as the avocado green which had decorated the kitchen, or the mural of a rusted tugboat they had discovered under the freaky clown wallpaper in his bedroom. His family hadn’t gotten around to saving the den from its decorating nightmare yet, but Ryan was just as glad not to need to paint another room yet. Satisfied that the room was clear, he went into the garage and checked behind the boxes. There were lots of places for a person to hide there, but no one hiding. The boxes were not how he remembered them, however. They had never been neatly stacked, but they had at least been shoved into one corner. Now it looked like someone had pulled some of the boxes out of that pile, and new, off-kilter stacks with bigger boxes on top of smaller ones had formed. Several boxes lay out by themselves, surrounded by their strewn about contents. If anything had been taken, it didn’t show, but there was no way to tell in this mess. He did notice that most of the open boxes contained books and odds and ends belonging to his father. Maybe he had been looking for something. He left the garage more suspicious that something was wrong than before. He could hear his heart in his ears in the house’s silence, and his arms were trembling. Telling himself that he wasn’t scared, that he had no reason to be scared, he turned to the last place he had to search. The basement.

Ryan crept down the stairs to the basement, listening the steps creak beneath him. They were covered by an ugly shag carpet in an amorphous red and blue pattern which he’d hated since he first saw it. At the bottom, the stairs ended at a wood paneled wall. To the right, through shuttered doors, was the laundry room. To the left, back along the stairs, was the main room of the basement. It was practically empty, aside from a bookshelf along the wall he stood by, and clearly unoccupied. Even in the dim light coming from the high half window on the far wall he could see that much. He turned the light in the laundry room on and quickly glanced inside. No one. He looked back into the long room of the finished basement, trying the light switch, but the bulb was dead. That didn’t surprise him. They rarely used this room, and for a very simple reason. There was a door in the back, which opened to a sunken patio with stairs to the backyard. The drain in the cement well could not be cleared by any means his family could discover, so the patio might as well have been a pool. It filled up every time it rained, flooding the basement. The smell of mildew still hung heavy in the air, even though it hadn’t rained in weeks. On the left wall near the back door was another door, opening to an unused study. That flooded too. They’d lost a nice set of encyclopedias, along with a bunch of other books, to the flooding and the accompanying mildew shortly after moving into this house. The door to the study was now closed, as was the back door to the sunken patio.

He’d looked everywhere else. If he was going to do a thorough job of it, there was only one place left. Ryan crossed the room in quick strides, the scent of mildew filling his nostrils. He sneezed, and as he recovered his breath through his mouth, he almost gagged on a strange metallic taste that coated his tongue. What could cause that? Reaching the door to the downstairs study, he hesitated, suddenly uncertain that he wanted to see what was on the other side. Don’t be silly. It’s just the study. There’s nothing to be afraid of! He tightened his grip on the useless machete, then twisted the knob and shoved the door open.

The stench of it hit him first. A familiar scent in small quantities, but foreign in its massiveness. The air was thick with it, more metallic than organic, and salty on his tongue. All his eyes could see in the dark, windowless room, all they were willing to see, was a mess, boxes strewn about, the metal strongbox containing their most important documents lying open and upside down on the floor, the papers falling out. The floor looked damp, as if they hadn’t completely dried it out the last time it flooded. And in the center, something that looked like a stained white blanket, now wet and ragged. He reached for the light switch, then snatched his fingers back when they touched something sticky. He wiped them on his jeans and tried again, this time flicking the switch on.

When he saw it, he doubled over, gagging. Nothing came up, and Ryan almost wished something would, that his body would keep him distracted from what he’d seen. Bent over, all he could see were his jeans; that and the crimson smear on them where he’d wiped his fingers off. No, there was no escape there. He looked up again, looked at the red liquid that dampened the carpet, the torn and limp form it had come from. It was almost unrecognizable, black and white and so much red. It looked like a hacked and misshapen toy, not a purebred English Springer Spaniel. Surely that large pool of blood could not have come from a single medium-sized dog. That unmoving, dead thing in the middle of the study floor bore no resemblance to Dozer, but Ryan knew it was him.

Ryan didn’t need to check that he was dead. When his unsteady steps brought him close enough that he could begin to recognize the individual parts of the form in front of him, he could tell. The head was nearly severed from the neck, not by a single cut, but by a trio of gashes in it. One leg was severed, another bent over backwards. An ear was cut off, a squashed eye hanging from the socket, great gouges carved out of his side so that the ribs and even the organs beneath showed. Dear God, if the dog had still lived, Ryan would have seen its heart beating. Whatever had done this hadn’t used a sharp blade. The cuts weren’t clean, but ragged, more tears than cuts. It might not have been a blade at all, just something thin and long swung with enough force to penetrate… he looked again at the machete in his hand, looked at the rust stains. His hand trembled when he reached for it, as his nail scraped the rust and it flaked off. It wasn’t rust.

He dropped the machete, practically threw it to the floor. His mind was screaming at him to hold onto it, that all his fears of an intruder weren’t so irrational anymore, that he needed it, but his physical revulsion at this sight, at the atrocious tool which had done it, overwhelmed rationality.

There was a clack of wood against wood and Ryan looked up. In the wall in front of him was a two foot by two foot door, really just plywood on hinges set at chest height. It led to a crawlspace, nothing more than a few feet of air between packed dirt and the supports for the first floor. Unable to use the basement for storage, they kept a few odds and ends in there, mostly old things his father called heirlooms. That clack had to have come from the door, but… Whatever courage had taken Ryan this far fled him. When the door began to push open, creaking on the hinges, Ryan turned and ran.


This story is a 2,677 word excerpt of an 80,000 word novel.

I was told, after I'd shown this story to my writing group, that I'd done something either very brave or very foolish by killing off the dog in this prologue. The American public, my friends told me, is very squeamish about violence to animals. When I first started writing this chapter, I didn't know that Ryan would find anything in the basement. It wasn't until I was about halfway through that I realized that the build-up demanded some payoff and Ryan would have to find something there, and that something would be a body. Given that, the choice was whether the body would be animal or human, and if the public is more squeamish about dead animals than dead people, well, then, I'm sorry. That's just the way it worked out, and as the details come out later in the book, it makes more sense this way.

If you want more, you can read the original version of this story, Eyes in the Shadow. It won't answer any of your questions about the dog, however, and if you want the complete story, you'll have to wait for the book.

Thursday, May 18, 2006

A little poetry
I mentioned a while ago that I was writing poetry for an out-of-genre writing assignment. A lot of what I wrote was pretty bad, but here's one that wasn't quite as dreadful as the others. It's a sci-fi poem, as it seems I can only go so far out of my usual genre.

Beyond the Stars

Do we stare into the ceaseless black
With the echoing silence in our ears?
Should we stretch to fill our lack,
Driven by the ambition of the years?

Across the blackness of its face
We seek a glimmering light.
But find nothing but empty space,
Nothing to ease our needless fright.

Though we have come so far
Our search has come to naught,
When every new discovered star
Reveals nothing we have not brought.

We gave up God so long ago,
And turned to the Universe.
Not wanting in death life’s truths to know,
We grasped at space to find answers.

Eternal life we dared to claim
Hoping that time this void would fill.
Instead we found more of the same
No joy, no peace, just empty will.

Fear now clutches clockwork hearts.
Iron breath mists in deadening cold.
Some say that divesting our mortal parts
Will bring the freedom of the bold.

But I—I think that I shall sleep,
And in that sleep there may be dreams.
And though I won’t survive that leap
Perhaps death is more than it seems.

Thursday, February 23, 2006

Interlude from Fire
The Rest of the Story: The whole of Fire can be found on my Writings page in PDF format, while the portion of the story that's been published on this blog so far is on this page.

This is it, the final part of Fire. The ironic thing is that it isn't really part of Fire at all. Fire isn't the name of a book, but rather of Part I of a book. This interlude forms the bridge between Part I and Part II, so it doesn't really belong in either part.


Interlude

"Kait hen!"

You have already damned them.

"You know what I mean."

Probably better than you do, but yes.

The copper-haired, stern-faced man sat on his shaped throne and stared into the crystal, watching the images, visible only to him, form inside the eight-foot cube. Cold gray light coming through windows high in the vaulted ceiling lit the crystal where it sat on its pedestal in the center of the room. A steady patter of rain fell against the windows, further annoying him. In the old days, it would only rain when he wanted it to rain. Now his people's reach no longer extended even that far. Once again, the voice was his only companion.

Why should the Kainar Wyren's actions concern you?

"The Kainar"--he refused to honor them with the second part of the name--"did not act at this moment by accident. They suspect something and are trying to intervene."

You are worried over nothing. No action of theirs can truly alter the political situation among the Ornar Kainar.

"They've started a civil war. I'd call that a change in the Or'Kainar political situation."

They prevented a civil war. The Ornar Kainar were on the verge of a tribal war for survival. The Kainar Wy... There was an amused paused, almost a mental er. The Kainar intervention prevented that. Let them war in the west and kill some Novari in the process. As long as it does not spread to their homeland, the situation there will be more favorable for our plans.

Sudden suspicion made the copper-haired man turn his head, although he had nothing at which to direct his gaze. His companion might have been anywhere or nowhere. "Did you have anything to do with this Elarun kainec war?"

Aside from the Orcs being too... wild for me to deal with effectively, you overestimate my influence. I am more limited than you beyond this prison.

"So you say."

I certainly cannot order someone killed, for instance. Perhaps you could tell me why you had your servant kill the Dominus.

"What makes you think I gave the order? The Kai'Daik acted on his own."

I know better than that. They cannot kill without your permission.

"He had gone over a year without a kill. This... took the edge off." He said this with a fond smile.

You do not let them kill for pleasure, yours or theirs.

"You are right, I did want that Shade dead."

Why?

"You already know the answer, don't you? Why should I have to say it? It's so our visitor can't go back. If he were to find what he's searching for here, his Order might have heard him out when he returned, might have relearned what they have forgotten. Now that they think him a murderer who practices ‘Death Magic,' he's harmless to us."

Did you really consider him such a threat before you framed him?

"No," the man said, watching a new image form in the crystal, an image of a black-robed man shivering in a dark library. His magic provided him with heat and light, but not enough of either. He sat on a hard, magically-preserved wooden chair, hunched over ancient books which he handled carefully to avoid damaging them. "A Kai'Daik is close enough to kill him at any moment. I don't want him dead, however. The Renegade might be a very useful tool, if not quite as useful as his nephew."



Gar had decided that the only difference between the night and the day in this blasted land was that you couldn't see the dirt at night. That did not prevent it from getting in his hair, his clothes, even his mouth. The last three days had been about as unpleasant as any since they began this journey. Mitveh had set the pace, allowing them to stop no more than a few hours each day to let the horses rest. They rode night and day, as if pursuit might be no more than moments behind. At first, they had traveled at a constant trot that ate up miles even as it wore the horses down. Now the horses simply plodded along through grass up to their chests, leaving troughs of trampled stalks in their wake. Neither Gar nor Mitveh were much good at hiding their passage, but Gar felt fairly certain that any pursuit must have given up by now. Bajnik's warlocks would know that Gar must have sent a message by now. Only a personal vendetta would keep them coming now... maybe it wasn't such a bad idea to maintain a fast pace.

Gar felt it approaching several minutes beforehand, but Mitveh saw it first. She just had time to point as the small flame feel from the night sky like a meteor. When it reached Gar where he rode on his plodding horse, it danced around his head like an overgrown firefly. He lifted his right hand, and the fire alighted there, where its orange glow illuminated only his hand and face.

Mitveh guided her horse closer for a better look. The bit of magic burning in Gar's hand did not look all that extraordinary. In a moment, however, a voice emerged from the flame, one Gar recognized immediately as belonging to Dert, a fellow an-sul warlock whose intelligence belied his ancestry. He spoke in the rapid-fire, monosyllabic dialect of the an-sul, which any sul would have difficulty deciphering. Peppered throughout the torrent were words and phrases which no normal an-sul would ever use, making the message confusing to them as well. Gar had sent his message the same way, in the hash of dialects shared among the few intelligent an-sul warlocks.

"I re-ceiv-ed message, go to Co'en. They wait for Mit-veh, no talk with East until then. Baj-nik send message, too. Say you kill Tal-nek and Na'lk. War'cks split, Co'n wait. Orm' and Sha'r leave, but north, not east. Look for fer-tile land. Witch-es say do Rite of Te-ne-var, done when you ar-rive."

"That was short," Mitveh said. She had listened carefully, but Gar didn't know how much she had followed.

"Short, but it contained a lot," Gar translated for her, "Bajnik sent word that I killed Talnek, which shouldn't surprise me. The warlocks are arguing over it, and the Coven's decided to wait for you before making a decision. They'll keep the news from home until then, and they agreed to perform the Rite of Tenevar. I have no idea what the tribes think, but the Ormin and Shatar have struck out on their own. Fortunately, they're looking for better loot rather than trying to go home."

"The tribes will follow the Coven. Mostly," Mitveh admitted. "A Wandering Coven doesn't have as much authority. As for the witches, I think I can convince them of what really happened. Did Dert say when the Rite would be complete?"

"By the time we arrive," he said. "What takes so long?"

"The Kawyr have to travel. The Rite is only complete when the Kawyr arrive."

"Oh."

"Do you think we'll convince them to seal the border?"

"I wouldn't be surprised if they had already done it. It'll take more than just the Kawyr to stop a whole tribe or two, though. We'll need troops, and probably some warlocks as well, to keep the passes closed. People we can trust."

"Are there any people we can trust?"

"That I don't know."



Gaius waited impatiently in the antechamber. The Emperor's personal secretary sat at a low table, scribbling on a wax tablet and occasionally reaching out to pat the cane which leaned against the desk. As the man remained hunched over his work, Gaius could see nothing aside from his bald pate. The young tribune vaguely recalled that Aulus thought that this wizened man was one of the most powerful people in Novaro. That just demonstrated the outrageousness of Aulus's ideas.

The antechamber was larger than most tenement apartments but still small by the standards of the palace. Plentiful windows, filled with actual glass, provided generous light this afternoon. A deep carpet of Kairnin design felt odd to feet that had become accustomed to a ship's deck, while the boring countryside scene painted on the plaster walls had not held Gaius's interest for half a minute. Since the secretary had the only seat in the room, Gaius wandered the room, sparing a few glances at the shelves stuffed with scrolls and wax tablets. He might have tried reading them, but aside from the fact that they looked like dreadfully boring records, the old man always seemed to watch him whenever he came close to the shelves. The secretary never said a thing. He hadn't said more than three words for the whole half-hour Gaius had been there. If the man was going to make him wait, he could have at least offered some conversation. The tribune had no one else with whom to talk at the moment.

Gaius had come to the palace the moment he got off the ship, having donned his toga before it had finished docking. Even a proconsul did not wear military garb before the Emperor. An escort had been waiting for him at the landing, but while they asked him as many questions as time allowed, they had not answered any of his, urging him to ask them of the Emperor. Paulus had accompanied him to the palace, dressed in a toga that looked the worse for the wear. It was he who had noticed the people watching them, whispering among themselves. Gaius would have dismissed his concerns as paranoia, except that he began to notice it himself. He couldn't place his finger on it, but he knew something about his arrival concerned them. They must know about the invasion, or even something more. Gaius hadn't heard any news while aboard the ship; half-a-dozen pigeons could have arrived in Novaro in that time. Whatever they knew, his hosts weren't talking. Paulus volunteered to ask around, and Gaius had let him. He himself had tried to draw some information out of the secretary--Tarquus or something, wasn't that his name?--without a whit of success.

With no discernible cue, Tarquus said, "You may go in now." He didn't even look up from his work.

Gaius opened the heavy oak door and went in. The Emperor's receiving room was smaller and darker than the antechamber. Slaves had shuttered the few small windows, leaving a single lamp stand for light. The empty hearth provided neither heat nor light on this summer day. A meaningless abstract pattern filled the tiled floors, although the painted walls held a much more interesting scene of battle. The sparse furniture, a few chairs and a writing desk, went unoccupied, as the two men and the woman inside all stood. The Emperor himself, for whom Gaius had been named, wore the purple toga signifying his rank. Gaius knew his uncle was in his sixties, but he had never looked it until now. The worn face and the stoop in his strong body marked a man who saw the end near. Gaius's father stood nearby, a broad purple stripe on the edge of his white toga. The elder Marcus Principius looked grim, but he stood as tall as ever.

"Gaius, I'm pleased you arrived safely," said the Emperor. "Vibia, we will continue this discussion later."

The Emperor's wife, dressed in gray silk, looked none too happy. Gaius had always admired her beauty, but her frosty gaze reminded him of her arrogance. Vibia's contempt for him detracted a great deal from her appeal. She swept from the room, leaving the three men alone. Tarquus closed the door from the outside.

"That was unpleasant," Marcus Principius said.

The Emperor shook his head, "You always did understate things. One would think she could let it go, given the situation, but she never was kind-hearted."

"I don't mean to interrupt, but there is news I came to share," Gaius said. He had never taken much interest in politics.

"Yes, I know, the Orcs. Have you heard what's happened since?" the Emperor said.

Gaius hadn't come just to repeat the pigeon's messages, but whatever news the Emperor had was more important than his dignity. "No, I haven't. What's happened?"

The Emperor looked to Gaius's father, who spoke up, "A pigeon arrived from New Jovium two days ago, telling us it was under siege. We've been waiting for more news, but it hasn't come. We fear the city has fallen."

"New Jovium? I didn't even know the Orcs had gotten through the pass. What happened to the legions there?"

The Emperor replied, "We don't know, but since New Jovium received no word of the Orcs' coming before they reached the city, the legions must have been unable to send word."

"So are they cut off, taken prisoner, what?"

"We haven't heard from them, so we don't know whether your brother and Publius are dead or alive, whether they're prisoner or free. All we know is that they could not stop the Orcs. The legions could have retreated and be preparing for a counterattack, or they could have been slaughtered to the last man."

Gaius felt sick. "Slaughtered. I never heard of such a thing."

Marcus Principius laid a hand on his son's shoulder. "It's not something Novari do. We rout the army, take prisoners when possible. The histories say Orcs don't take prisoners, though. They kill humans on sight."

"Do you believe the histories?" He remembered the Dominus's low view of Novar records, but he had also mentioned the Orc's unreasoning hatred of humans.

Gaius's father let his hand drop. "I don't know."

"Neither do I," said the Emperor. "A month ago I wasn't certain that the Orcs had ever existed. Now, the histories I only half-believed are the only things we have to go on."

"So you think Marcus is dead?"

"I don't know," said Gaius's father. "But we must admit the possibility."

"Maybe you do," Gaius said. "I don't intend to."
The Emperor gave a fierce smile that somehow made him look stronger. "Good for you." The smile faded as suddenly as it had appeared. "I'm afraid that isn't the worst news we have today, though."

Marcus Principius sighed. "He's right. Gaius, Lucia is dead."

This time Gaius felt dizzy as well as sick, and confused more than anything else. "What? How? How could she be dead?"

"There was a fire. It destroyed our townhouse. We found two bodies afterwards, one of them was Lucia's, the other one was a Dominus."

"A Dominus?" Gaius tried to think, to figure out what it meant that the same fire had killed both his sister and a Dominus. He wanted to blame the Dominus. Knowing what they really did had not made them any more noble in his mind. He couldn't think of any reason why they would want Lucia, however. They only trained boys. And he couldn't figure out how a Dominus could get himself killed in a fire, not after all the things he had seen one of them do. "What are you going to do?"

Marcus Principius clenched and unclenched his right fist, a stone-hard look on his face. "Wringing the truth out of the next Dominus I see sounds very appealing right now. One Dominus in particular needs a bit of wringing."

"While that might make you feel better, we have an Empire to defend right now," the Emperor said. "You, both of you, need to put thoughts of vengeance aside and start thinking about survival. This morning the Domini offered us their help against the Orcs."

"You intend to accept aid from those monsters?" Gaius snarled.

"You tell me. The letter I received from Publius credited two things for your escape from Kawyr lands: your own leadership and the Dominus. In your opinion, do we need help from the Domini?"

Although Gaius knew the answer, he wracked his brain for another one over several long moments. The Emperor waited, arms crossed. "Yes, we need their help. We can't beat the warlocks otherwise. But--"

"No buts. I understand your reluctance, and I have no illusions about who we're dealing with. They took my brother too, remember? If we need their help to survive, however, we'll take it. At their worst, they don't want us all dead, and that's better than the Orcs."

"Yes, sir," Gaius muttered. But if they're responsible for Lucia's death, I'll personally strangle every last one of them. He felt a tightness in his chest and had to cough to cover the rising emotion and give himself time to tamp it down.

"I know it's a bad sign when you call me ‘sir.'" The Emperor gave a small, comforting smile. "Just try not to start a war with the Domini. You know better than all of us that we need them." He paused a moment, looking hard at Gaius. The Emperor must have liked what he saw, for he said, "I'm sending you back to the front line. Will you be ready to leave in three days?"

"Of course." It didn't give him much time in the city, but he didn't have much to do here anyway. His home had been destroyed, most of his family lost or dead. He could visit a few friends, but he just didn't see what he had to say to them. None of them had seen what he'd seen, or lost what he'd lost. He quickly wiped his eyes.

"Gaius," Marcus Principius said. They both looked at him, but he was addressing his brother. "I should go as well."

"No, I need you here. The succession--"

"There hasn't been a struggle over the succession in two hundred years."

The Emperor sighed. "There might be now. Vibia wants to make that boy Emperor."

"That boy is your grandson."

"He's an Agnatii pawn, and I will not let them rule Novaro. To stop them, I need you here looking like my heir. Is that understood?"

"Yes, your Majesty."

"And don't call me that. I'm not some Manuelite king," the Emperor growled.

Gaius didn't really understand their conversation. He thought they might be talking about his cousin Dominicus, the son of the Emperor's daughter from a previous marriage. That was the only grandson that Gaius knew about.

The Emperor turned to address Gaius again. "Now, as I was saying, you'll be leading both of Novitia's legions when you go."

"Leading? You're putting me in command of two legions?"

"Four, by the time you reach Ciskainia. Cisolympia and Anorum will each send one as well. I'm afraid that's the most I can give you on short notice. It'll be months before you have all ten."

"Sir, I'm hardly experienced enough to lead four legions, much less ten." Each of the ten provinces had two standing legions during peace times, one of which the Emperor could take command of at any time. During times of war, the provinces could raise at least two additional legions, one of which would be placed at the Emperor's disposal.

"You're calling me ‘sir' again. No, don't apologize, listen. You're the only tribune I have who's seen what we face, and the only one who's fought alongside a Dominus. You'll have other, experienced tribunes, and consuls as well, to guide you, but right now I need someone who knows what we face to direct the action. Do you have a staff?"

"A staff?"

"People to give you advice and run the administrative side of things. Who of the people who came with you were out there?"

"Just Paulus, a couple of other centurions, some veteran legionaries. No Patrician officers."

"Well, that'll have to do for now. This Paulus is a centurion? Make him First Centurion of your lead legion. Use those others as well as you can. I'll personally assign my most capable men to your staff."

In short time, Gaius found himself back in the antechamber, where the secretary--maybe his name was Tarinus--handed him several formal looking documents. By the time Paulus arrived, he was heading out to inspect the troops. He had lost both a brother and a sister in the same day, but he had too much to do to acknowledge the loss. He didn't stop to think about whether he could keep this up, since he instinctively knew that if he stopped, he wouldn't be able to get going again. While he possessed the rank of tribune in the Ciskainian legions, that title did not give him official standing in Novitia. Instead, the Emperor had given him the title of legate, an Imperial appointee who oversaw legions without being a member of them. The legions themselves had long derided legates, seeing that title as a political reward given out for loyalty rather than ability. Gaius feared that he would only reinforce that preconception.



Lucia held on to her seat as the two-wheeled wagon bounced on the uneven paving stones. The bright sunlight warmed her back, but the wind rippling through the green grass kept the heat down. Hills of it stretched in all directions, blocking out all sight of man-made structures. Only the Novar road gave any hint of human habitation, and even it passed beyond sight only a mile or so in either direction. Over the past few days, signs of civilization had become fewer and farther between as they approached the Olympian mountains. The lack of traffic fed into her sense of abandonment. They might have been the last two people in the world for all that she could see. Lucia had spent most of her life in a city where she was never more than fifty steps from a dozen other people. This isolation wore on her nerves, not to mention the sheer boredom of riding this wagon day after day with only Raxtus to talk to. As Raxtus only wanted to talk about how his shipping business was going and the women he had known, this conversation lost interest to Lucia right away. She suspected that Raxtus had more interesting stories to tell, but he would shut up the moment the conversation strayed to the less legal side of his business. When Lucia wanted to talk, he would at least grunt in the right places, but she found that she didn't trust herself enough to talk much to him. There was too much of a risk that she would say something she shouldn't and drop a clue to her true identity.

"Are you sure this is the right way?" she asked her driver.

Raxtus didn't look at her for a moment, instead muttering something under his breath. She couldn't overhear what he said, but she sensed annoyance. "This is what the folks in that town told us. If Aulus had given me better directions, we wouldn't have had to ask."

Raxtus had not liked going into the town at all. He had made her ask the questions while he sat in the wagon trying not to be seen, radiating a readiness to bolt. The man had to be as paranoid as Aulus. Still, though cautious, he had had enough courage to face down bandits twice on this journey.

"Does any of this look familiar, Marcia?" he asked.

"Not really," she admitted, unfazed by her alias. "It was a long time ago." Raxtus grunted and muttered something about "forgetful girl." She had heard him use worse names.

"Why does your grandfather live in the middle of nowhere, anyway? It's so out of the way, it doesn't even have a decent road. This one hasn't been maintained in years."

"He likes his privacy," she said, not really knowing the answer. Lucia had never understood why anyone would shun the city life.

With a suddenness that surprised them both, the manor house appeared like an island rising from the green sea. Nestled between two hills, the house had been hidden until now. It did not resemble the sprawling brick Novar villas, instead Lucia's grandfather had built his home of wood, tall rather than wide. It stood three stories high, with wide open windows to let in the breeze on this warm summer day. A colonnade fronted the long porch to uphold a balcony on the second story. Smaller buildings lay beside and behind the home. She recognized her grandfather's workshop, where he produced all sorts of wonderful wooden objects, a stable for his horses opening on a large fenced-in field, and small cottages where her grandfather's servants lived.

"This it?" Raxtus asked, pulling up his mules.

She nodded. "Yes."

"Well, grab your stuff and go."

"You're not staying?" she asked, suddenly uncomfortable at the thought of facing her grandfather alone. He would think she was Jaelin, and things would just get worse from there.

"I did my job, getting you here. From the way the townspeople spoke of this relative of yours, he's not someone I want to meet."

She had not thought Raxtus paid attention. The townspeople had been uncomfortable about her grandfather, even a little fearful. She remembered him as gruff with outsiders, but she had never thought of him as dangerous before. "But--"

He didn't let her finish. "You getting off here or not, girl?"

"Yeah. I guess so," she said, shouldering the bag with her few belongings and hopping off the wagon. She barely had time to wave good-bye before Raxtus got the mules moving again.

She gave a brief sigh, then turned toward the house and started down the gravel footpath which stretched from the road to the porch. She took them off and walked instead in the wild grass beside the path. The tall blades tickled her legs inside her dress, but she preferred that over the hot, sharp stones of the pathway. The small sack slung over her shoulder grew heavier as she approached the front door. So far, she had not seen anyone about the yard. Lucia tried not to think about what she would do if her grandfather had abandoned his manor. Her only transportation must be half a mile away by now. Not knowing what else to do, she pounded on the door. "Hello," she shouted. Sounds of movement emanated from inside, though she could not see anything, even through the wide open windows. Her grandfather himself opened the door a few moments later.

Though Gulwith had to be much older than Lucia's father, he looked younger. White strands peppered his full hair and beard, but his face evidenced no wrinkling. He stood almost as tall as Marcus Principius, and with a larger frame he looked huge even through Jaelin's eyes.

"Jaelin!" he said. "Avla sent a letter saying that you had disappeared when Lucia--" he cut off. Lucia suddenly felt anxious. Of course mother would have written, and however much her grandfather had loved Jaelin, he wouldn't deny his own daughter. Why couldn't she read him? He was as blank as the Dominus. "I should have known you'd find your way here," he said, his voice softening. "You always were a survivor." He wrapped his arms around her in a suffocating hug.

Lucia's alarm had barely begun to fade when Gulwith stiffened. "Lucia?" he said, pushing her out to arm's length. Lucia opened her mouth to explain, wondering how she could, wondering whether she should, when her grandfather began to hum. She remembered him always humming to himself, and the familiar sound soothed her immediately. She felt younger, not the little girl she had been when she last saw her grandfather, but her own age, not Jaelin's. Her grandfather looked even larger and older than a moment ago, a true adult who would know what to do. The uncomfortable body, still unfamiliar after two months, became familiar and comfortable.

Her clothes did not seem comfortable, however, but several sizes too large. She brushed a locke of her dark hair out of her eyes. Why did the color seem odd? She had always had black hair, except when she had been Jaelin. When had that been?

"Come inside, Lucia. I have a feeling you have a long story to tell while you still remember it. I want to know how Jaelin died," he said, a hand covering his face for a moment before it patted her hair.

"Yes, grandfather," she said, led along by his firm hand on her back and his humming in her ear.

"I think you'll be staying with me for a while," Gulwith said. Somehow, the humming seemed to continue even while he spoke. "Maybe I'll teach you something about music."


This is the final 4,849 words of a 90,110 novel.

I hope you enjoyed Fire. As you can see from this "ending," the story is not complete. Rather, I've placed everybody in a position that I can leave them alone for a while and pick up after they've had some time to grow. Water, the next part of the book, starts two years after the events in the Interlude.

Friday, February 10, 2006

The Coup, Chapter 17 of Fire
The Rest of the Story: The whole of Fire can be found on my Writings page in PDF format, while the portion of the story that's been published on this blog so far is on this page.

This is it, the final regular chapter of Fire. Now that we have chaos in Novaro and Ciskainia and among the Domini, it's time to spread it a little.


Chapter 17
The Coup

The pen, like every one he had ever used, felt awkward in Gar's hand. His half-sul master had taught him to write before even beginning his education in magic, but even after all this time, pens still felt wrong in his broad hand with its thick, short fingers, so unlike the long, graceful fingers of the sul. Writing made his hand ache, and his best scribing looked sloppy and malformed. He enjoyed writing anyway, even when he had to work at a small field desk with only a single lamp. Though the round tent was tall enough for him to stand upright and wide enough to comfortably hold the dozen bunks within, only Gar occupied it tonight. The noise of the night's celebration had finally died down, leaving him a chance to pen his thoughts in his journal:
11 Destris, Eighth year of King Talnek

It's been fourteen days since the Battle of the Pass. Talnek and I arrived at the Novar port city today with a small detachment of his
Nasholk. Mitveh travelled with us. I had hoped The main army remains at the last village we razed. We left behind the ruins of that worthless village there to find the larger city here already in flames. Bajnik's vanguard had destroyed the city this morning. His hastiness infuriated our king, and for once I agreed with Talnek. He had wanted Bajnik to besiege the city, not destroy it, preferably forcing the humans to surrender. I also want prisoners. I need to know more about this land, and a single prisoner, especially a Dominus, would provide more information than a thousand close-mouthed Kawyr. Bajnik's warlocks levelled the Domini's tower first thing this morning, killing all within. They then systematically destroyed the humans' boats so the soldiers could slaughter the populace and pillage the town. They did not include any writings in their looting, preferring to use such materials as tinder. Those writings may not have done me much good, as I haven't managed to decipher the language, but I would give my right hand for a map!

The only source of information we have about this land is whatever bits and pieces Talnek passes on from what the Kawyr tell him. I'm not sure whether he tells us everything, but if he does, he follows the Kawyr much too blindly. Which means we follow him too blindly. Why do we, why do I, follow him? I don't much trust Talnek and I don't really like him, but I have to respect him. He's intelligent enough that even I respect his mind, and much more open-minded than the average
sul. Too bad he's married to that self-serving, arrogant witch. I definitely prefer his leadership to the likes of Mular or Bajnik, and I shudder to imagine the state of the Orcs under the leadership of a coward like the late Deslar. For now, though, I'm willing to be led by Talnek, and he's willing to be led by the Kawyr. So far, this Empire where they've led us is nothing like the land of milk and honey they promised.

The grasslands we've seen are dry and empty, unfit for cultivation. That a few farm villages have grown up on it anyway makes me wonder about this Empire's supposed wealth. Nothing we've looted from them speaks of great resources. The burning city, more a town really, had little more to offer. The greatest find came in the form of several dozen jars of wine. It isn't even enough for the small force here, but Bajnik made sure that Talnek's guard received a lion's share of the wine, perhaps thinking that it will appease the king. That's unlikely, as our king doesn't bribe easily. He and Bajnik have been arguing long into the night. Deciding to do better things with my time, I drank with the
an-sul among Bajnik's troops. Though they had been provided little in the way of alcohol, Bajnik's Toltem and Muirthin soldiers have been celebrating the sacking of the city with more vigor than Talnek's Nasholk sul. I retired to my tent before the carousing reached its highest levels. Even from here, I could hear them. It didn't quiet down sufficiently for me to write until just an hour ago. It must be almost midnight by now.

Gar put down his pen to stretch his hand, opening and closing it to work out the cramps in his fingers. Maybe the problem did not lie in his hand but in the pen. The wooden reed mounted with a metal tip was too thin for his an-sul hand to grip properly. A thicker rod would provide a better grip.

A loud ruckus outside interrupted his ruminations. He could hear the tramping of feet and the chink of mail armor. Shouted orders accompanied the noise, but Gar couldn't make out what the commander said. Rising, he picked up the wooden staff leaning against the field desk. He didn't need it, since his leg had fully healed days ago, but he had grown used to carrying it. Gar hesitated before pulling back the tent flap. Talnek knew he had appropriated this tent from some of Bajnik's scribes; let them come looking for him if they needed his help. What did he care what they did without him? Most likely it wouldn't affect him one way or another. Gar was halfway back to his desk when he discovered he wasn't alone.

"Wife." The word cracked like a whip. "You shouldn't be here."

Mitveh flinched at his tone. She stood by the rear flap of the tent, almost hidden in the darkness. Gar couldn't make out the expression on her shadow-obscured face, but she spoke coldly. "I am not your wife any longer."

"According to the Coven, you never were." He did not know which the Coven had found more repulsive, the union of sul and an-sul, or of witch and warlock. Either way, they had wasted no time nullifying the marriage as soon as his young wife's best friend had betrayed them.

"We don't have time for this," she said, an unfamiliar note in her voice. Was it fear?

"Of course not. You haven't spoken to me in seven years. You wouldn't break your silence just to tell me why you had kept it." Gar knew the answer to that question anyway. The Coven had cowed her, and none of his entreaties could convince her that love was worth more than her status among them.

"Gar, I need your help." Urgency laced her tone. "Talnek is dead, Bajnik killed him."

The warlock felt his stomach drop. "I don't suppose Bajnik challenged him to a legitimate duel."

"He stabbed the king in the back while his men assaulted Talnek's guards. He's now sending soldiers to slaughter the remaining Nasholk tribesmen."

What a horrid time for an assassination! Bajnik had twice the age yet half the wisdom of Talnek. "Does he really think he can unite the tribes behind him? Bajnik lacks the diplomatic genius of our poor, dead king. I suppose he means to make sure no one knows he committed regicide. How did you escape?"

"I have my ways. Why haven't they come after you?"

"They probably haven't figured out that I displaced Bajnik's entire administrative staff to take this tent. Talnek knew where I was, but how did you find me?"

"Talnek..." the lie died on her lips. "I... still have my half of our heartstone."

That surprised Gar. With their separate halves, they could find each other from opposite ends of the world if necessary. Why had she kept it, from sentiment or for an emergency such as this? Mitveh probably couldn't tell him any more than he could explain why he still wore his half around his neck. He put that thought away so he could deal with more pressing matters. "Bajnik's warlocks will discover where I am soon enough. We should go."

"His warlocks? Will they really fight you? No tribal chief can command the warlocks."

"We can't be commanded, no, but we can be bought. We have no loyalty to anyone, not even each other." Even as he spoke, he could sense three warlocks approaching. At least we can't sneak up on each other. "You had better hide. Use that shadow-charm you used to escape Bajnik." A brief look of surprise passed over Mitveh's face. Did she really think he had forgotten all of her tricks? She didn't ask any questions, though, and she didn't hesitate. Instead, she leaned back into the shadows and they grew deeper to hide her.

Gar turned to face the entrance, leaning on his staff as he waited. A tall sul warlock named Bultas entered, followed by two of his an-sul brethren. Gar didn't recognize either of them as anything other than Bultas's muscle. They looked the part. If not for the red robes, he would have taken them for soldiers. Gar held his magic at the ready, not daring to make the first move.

"Hello, Gar."

"What's going on?"

Bultas smiled to show his flat sul teeth. Both of his comrades had teeth sharpened like Gar's own. "I've come to make an offer. Bajnik is the new king of the Orcs, and he'd like you to join us."

"Bajnik isn't fit to lead the Toltem, and they'll accept anyone." Gar should know, as he had been born a Toltem. "What makes him think he can lead the entire Orcish nation?"

"He has the support of the Muirthin. He's marrying their chief's youngest daughter, which will make him the most powerful Orc on this side of the mountains." Bultas frowned at Gar's lack of enthusiasm. "Come on, Gar, why should this be a hard choice? It's no secret that you didn't like Talnek, and you and Bajnik both opposed this expedition in the first place. Do you have one good reason why you shouldn't join us?"

"I have several, but first and foremost is the fact that I like Bajnik even less than Talnek. So what's my alternative to joining the revolution?"

"Just this!" Bultas said as he leapt to his right. The Orc on his left already had his hand uplifted and the magic flowing. A small ball of flame flew from his hand. The magic flooded Gar, but not fast enough, and he knew he couldn't avoid his death. He was as surprised as anyone when the flaming sphere swerved away from him, grazing his arm as it flew into the shadows near the rear flap. Gar had no time to breathe in relief. His shield now in place, flames flew from his own hand, a stream of fire which stopped inches short of Bultas. The Orc on Bultas's right began to circle around the tent to get behind Gar.

The dull eyes of the an-sul on Bultas's left stared into the shadows where his fireball had disappeared. He never saw the small dart that struck him on the neck. As he reached up to slap the thing that had bit him, his hand spasmed while half raised. Tremors struck his other arm the next moment, then he fell to the ground as they seized his legs, where he lay convulsing and spitting garbled cries.

Bultas kept control of both his wits and his magic, but his henchman cried out in alarm at his companion's fall. Gripping his staff firmly with both hands, Gar swung it at the warlock's skull. The an-sul's shield against magic did nothing to stop simple wood, and the staff connected with a sickening crunch. The warlock fell, and a wave of flame washed over Gar, originating from Bultas. Several layers of his shield vanished, but Gar didn't try to wrap stronger protection around himself. Instead, a beam of pure flame shot from his hand, the narrow flow drilling through Bultas's shield and then his forehead. The sul warlock dropped to the ground.

Fires had broken out all over Gar's tent. The two dead an-sul blazed, while flames licked the wall, three of the cots, and the field desk. They had gutted his journal. Smoke smelling of wood, leather, and flesh filled the space and caused his eyes to water. Mitveh emerged from the shadows, thin tendrils of smoke rising from her hair.

"Are you all right?" Gar asked.

"A bit singed," she replied. "What was he trying to do, burn down the camp?"

"He put more power than focus into his attack. I did the opposite. Come on, let's go."

They left the tent by the back entrance, where the cool night air cleared the smoke from their lungs. Mitveh seized his hand in her left as her right hand fingered a small amulet around her neck, a five-pointed star of black metal. Gar recognized the shadow-charm just before darkness engulfed them both. Though the magic blinded the warlock completely, he knew that Mitveh could still see, so he had to trust her to get them to their destination while avoiding discovery. As long as she stayed out of well-lit areas, no one would notice a deeper darkness among the shadows. Thus, they moved through the darkest areas, within the narrow openings between the small tents. Both Gar and Mitveh stumbled often, since her immunity from the shadow-charm did not help her with the natural darkness. Unable to see anything at all, Gar moved cautiously yet still tripped over the uneven ground, tent ropes, and even Mitveh. He held tightly onto her slim hand, ignoring memories of the last time he had held it. He remembered it as warm and dry; now it felt cold and damp. Both of them sweated from the tension. An unnerving silence filled the camp, so that Gar felt certain that their enemies must hear every sound they made. Every once in a while another sound intruded on their own harsh breathing. They heard snoring an-sul as they passed between the tents of Toltem soldiers. Distant tramping signaled the movements of a small force of Bajnik's troops. Once, shouting started right in front of them. Gar might have panicked if Mitveh had not given his hand a reassuring squeeze. When he could hear the words above the drumming of his own heartbeat, he realized he was listening to an an-sul sergeant dressing down an underling. The two retreated further into the shadows and found another path. Their worst danger came from the nearly two dozen warlocks who had volunteered for Bajnik's vanguard. Gar wondered why the unusual display of eagerness had not struck him as odd at the time, since most warlocks had to be bullied or bribed into doing anything. He focused his attention on detecting the other warlocks before they sensed him. His only advantage was that they had no way of telling his alignment from their sense of him, whereas he knew that every warlock he could feel was an enemy.

They came to a stop somewhere in the northern part of the camp. He could feel many warlocks close by, two of them very near. "Why are we stopping?" he whispered in her ear, the first words he had dared to speak since they left his tent. He could smell her burnt hair.

"We've reached Talnek's troops," she whispered back.

"Let me see."

The darkness lifted. Gar found himself in the shadows between two small tents, each with enough room for four soldiers. Ten of these tents stood in a rough circle around an open area where several dying fires lay. Amidst the fires were nearly forty Orcs, the whole of Talnek's Nasholk. The dim light made it difficult to tell why they lay unmoving, but it did not take a leap of logic to reason that they were dead. The an-sul warlock couldn't see anyone else, not even the two warlocks whom he suspected waited for him. Mitveh started to move forward, but Gar tightened his hold on her hand.

"They're expecting us," he whispered. "Two warlocks."

She turned her head, just a shadowed suggestion of a face visible in this light. "Just two?"

"Stay here for now. I'll need your help in a moment, but try not to kill them."

With that, Gar strode into the clearing. They must have set up this ambush once they realized Bultas had failed, assuming that he would come here. Two warlocks hardly seemed enough where three had failed, but they must have thought he would simply steer clear of a larger gathering. They could feel him approaching, and they had to know he would sense them. Did they think he wouldn't recognize it as a trap? They would expect him to try to sneak around them, where he would trigger their trap. He intended to surprise them by coming straight on. Though he couldn't tell where they hid, he knew he was getting closer. With luck, they had no idea Mitveh was with him, since her unexpected presence would give him his only advantage.

The first dead Nasholk whom Gar passed had his throat cut, as did the second. The third had fought, his foot severed and a savage wound opening his chest. By and large, however, it looked as if most had died unresisting. Bajnik must have drugged the wine, or simply poisoned it. The surprisingly little blood suggested that most of their hearts had already stopped beating.

Gar approached the center of the camp, wondering when the attack would come. The warlocks had to be wondering why he marched directly towards them. When he came to the center of the circle of tents, his magic reached out to the smoldering fires. Dying embers came to life, spewing thick, black clouds of smoke. Gar took advantage of the cover, running to his right even as a storm of fireballs flew at him. He gagged from the smoke despite being the its source. Once he broke free of the cloud, Gar spun around, searching for the two warlocks through blurry eyes. One of them, a sul, came into sight, circling around the edge of the smoke to find him. Gar saw him first. The smoke cloud boiled as tendrils struck at the warlock. Smoke enveloped the sul before he realized what was happening, tentacles reaching for nostrils and throat. He tried to cough, but that simply allowed more smoke to pour in. Coughing became impossible as the warlock began choking, falling to his knees. Still the smoke continued to rush into him, draining the cloud to wispy mist. Then, as he fell face forward onto the ground, Gar reversed the magic, and the smoke left the warlock's body to dissipate into the night air.

He spied Mitveh on the other side of the cloud, the narrow tube of her blowgun in her hand. The other warlock, also a sul, lay before her as she checked to see whether he still lived. Looking satisfied, she left the Orc behind and came over to Gar, stepping through the vanishing cloud. "He's still alive, although I don't know why you wanted him that way."

"The other warlocks have already sensed the magic. If they had felt a fellow warlock die, they would have come running. Some of them are coming anyway. The rest probably think it's a false alarm"

"Then we should get to the horses quickly."

The Nasholk had picketed their horses close to their camp. Gar and Mitveh retrieved two apiece, and were underway before any more warlocks had appeared. Mitveh rode with an elegance which Gar had always envied. No matter how often he rode, he did not have the grace or instinct of a sul. Mitveh's shadow-charm could no longer provide cover, since the horses would not tolerate total darkness, but the Nasholk had pitched their tents near the edge of the camp, and they only had to disable three guards to clear Bajnik's army.

Mitveh set a hard pace heading north for the first few miles, until Gar could no longer sense the warlocks pursuing them. Speed rather than stealth had gotten them that far, but they could not rely on it forever. So they turned westward, clearly the wrong direction and hopefully throwing off pursuers. Still, Gar kept looking over his shoulder to see if they were being followed, since he knew it would not take a skilled tracker to follow them. Fortunately, they would not need to run for long.

As the night gave way to the gray pre-dawn, the witch allowed a brief rest. Gar slid from his horse, eager to put some distance between him and the animal. It had been Talnek's, and Gar had a feeling it did not like him. Mitveh dismounted and sat on the bedroll her horse had carried, staring into the dawn. She did not look like she intended to sleep, and neither did Gar. He knelt in front of her.

"I need to know what happened," he said.

"Why?" she replied. He just looked at her until she shook her head. "No, you're right, I should tell you, but not yet. I'm too tired, and..."

"I need to know now." A small flame flickered to life in his cupped hand. "So I can tell my friends what has happened."

"I had forgotten warlocks could send such messages." She looked tired. And dirty. Her pale green skin looked drawn and even paler than usual except for where the dust had darkened it. "Do you even have friends? Will they help?"

"Yes. My... allies, let's call them, don't like Bajnik either, and with this information they can help."

"And then what will happen?"

"Most likely civil war. The horde here will scatter, and the alliance at home will fracture. We'll fight one another on both sides of the mountains, fight the humans on this side, and maybe even fight the Kawyr on the other. In other words, we'll follow our nature, like we always do."

"Would it be better to just let him go through with it?" she spat. "Letting murder decide the succession, and letting Bajnik get away with killing Anyua's husband?"

"I'm the one offering to send the message, remember?"

"Why? You certainly didn't like Talnek, and you and Bajnik have practically spoken with one voice about this expedition. Why are you offering to help me now? Why did you help before?"

Because you asked. Because, for the first time in eight years, you actually spoke to me. "Because while Bajnik and I agreed about this ill-conceived invasion, we don't agree about much else. Because I will not follow a king who believes in taking what he wants no matter who he has to kill for it. Because civil war will come anyway, and I'd rather our people had a cause more noble to fight for."

Mitveh looked into his eyes, and he watched hers, as he used to enjoy watching them years ago. She had to know that he had not told her the whole truth, but he didn't know whether she could guess what he had left unsaid. When she spoke, she simply answered the question that Gar had forgotten asking, "Talnek and Bajnik were arguing about the Kawyr, as usual. Bajnik must have already planned his move, but he seemed sincere in trying to sway the king. Talnek had spoken to the Kawyr at length about the humans, and he seemed to think that not all of them had to be killed. He had already told Bajnik that he wanted prisoners here, but now he talked about conquering cities, ruling over humans rather than slaughtering them. Even I couldn't believe that. Why should we let any of those awful creatures live? He turned his back on Bajnik, to say something to me, I think. I saw the sword emerge from his chest even as he opened his mouth. Only blood came out... Bajnik then turned to me while his guards attacked Talnek's. I panicked, used my shadow-charm and ran. That caught Bajnik by surprise even though it could not have been too effective in that brightly-lit tent. The poor thing's almost dead now. I overused it tonight."

A sliver of the sun appeared over the mountains, and Gar could make out her face clearly. She looked lost, staring through him rather than meeting his eyes. "Gar, what will happen now?"

"Like I said, there will be war," he answered. "The Nasholk and their allies will fight against the Toltem and theirs, other tribes will go their own ways, renewing old feuds. Each warlock will join whichever side pays him the most, and the Coven will pretend to be above it all while making every side believe that they have its secret backing. Sul will fight for reasons they think they understand, and an-sul will fight because they're told to. It always returns to this sooner or later. I suppose that in another hundred years some tribe will start a stable dynasty, and we'll tell ourselves that we've changed, we'll have peace from now on, until it all falls apart again. The only difference is that the humans and the Kawyr have been thrown into the mix."

"That is a difference though, isn't it?" she said, looking at him this time. "Couldn't having a common enemy, and a common friend, unify us?"

Gar shook his head. "I doubt it. However much we hate the humans, tribes don't aid their enemies against the barbarian raids. It takes a king to pull us together. There is no king here now."

"There is one on the other side of the mountains. Masnek is Talnek's rightful heir."

"Do you really think that what's happened here can be kept from influencing the succession back home?"

"If they don't know, then maybe. Even warlocks can't send messages that distance. Only the Coven has the means to do that, and we have only one such charm with us. If the Coven keeps this news from reaching the kingdom, then perhaps we can contain the fighting and keep the succession secure."

Gar thought about it. Lying did not bother him when it served his purpose, and he did not want to see the an-sul back home suffer, even if he could not bring himself to care about Masnek's right to rule. "We'll need the Kawyr's help." The words tasted bitter to him, especially considering the reason he needed their help. "They need to prevent any Orc from returning to the east. Until we resolve the situation here, this army is in exile."


This chapter is 4,440 words long, excerpted from a novel of 90,110 words.

I knew I had to kill Talnek the moment I sent the Orcs west. I couldn't have them conquering the Novar Empire, and the Novari didn't have enough legions to meet them. The Orcish force contains about 300,000, and with only twenty-two standing legions of about 5,000 each, the humans are severely outnumbered. However, Orcs are highly fractious, and a power struggle at the top was enough to split them into warring factions. Unfortunately for the humans, there are still too many Orcs to dislodge those who have settled in Ciskainia, so they'll remain a problem in the east for some time to come.

I really liked the relationship between Mitveh and Gar in this chapter. I honestly had no idea what was going on with them when I introduced Mitveh back in chapter thirteen. I just knew I wanted to keep Gar out of the exchange between Mitveh and Talnek, and it was only later that I figured out why he was avoiding Mitveh. This twist worked surprisingly well, and led to some other ideas I'm still working out.

And, if I had any doubts about it back in Chapter 9 when I first wrote for Gar's point of view, this chapter made it clear that Gar rocks. I originally introduced him as a stereotypically evil warlock, but he's really grown on me.

Wednesday, January 25, 2006

Verdict, Chapter 16 of Fire
The Rest of the Story: The whole of Fire can be found on my Writings page in PDF format, while the portion of the story that's been published on this blog so far is on this page.

This chapter had a lot of interesting stuff, and I learned a lot about how the Domini operated. Most importantly, it moved the story forward in a lot of ways--more on that later. For now, here's Chapter 16 of Fire.


Chapter 16
Verdict

"Yes."

While a ripple ran through the watching Domini, both Senators and observers, Randall just breathed a sigh of relief. For a moment, he had thought that Victor would not go through with it. Kulsin was smiling now, ready for the kill. "Tell me about it," he said as the murmuring died down.

That Victor did, reluctantly, the words being dragged out of him by Kulsin's probing questions. Victor avoided meeting Kulsin's or Aulus's eyes, mostly looking at the floor. The tale he told, of meeting with Aulus several times a month over the last two years before he came here, of learning the basics of Essence and Circuits, was believable and convincing. He kept his story simple, only filling in details as Kulsin prompted him. If Randall had not known about Aulus's message to his nephew, he would have believed the story.

Kulsin fought hard not to grin, but Randall could see the triumph in his eyes. "Tell me, Victor, did Aulus ever have any contac' with your sister?"

For the first time, Victor raised his head, eyes darting between Randall, Kulsin, and Aulus. Despite his obvious uncertainty, it took him only a moment to answer "No."

"Are you certain?" Kulsin pressed.

"I'm certain that I don't know anything about it." Victor looked at Aulus openly now, a real question in his gaze. Aulus gave no sign that Randall could see.

"Did she know about your meetin's with Aulus? Did you tell her about them, teach her anythin'?" Kulsin was shooting blind now. Randall relaxed a bit, but Victor seemed even more wary.

"No, nothing. I didn't tell anyone about my uncle. What does Lucia have to do with this?" He then belatedly added, "If I may ask."

"Lucia is dead."

"What? Dead? How--?" Victor's voice cracked, halting his sudden rush of words. His face had lost color and expression.

"Lucia was killed by magic, probably her own. A Dominus went to speak to her about Aulus. We don't know what happen' between them, but some spark of uncontrolled magic started an unnatural fire that killed both of them. No one else was harm'." Victor's mouth moved, but Randall could not hear any sound which he may have made. Kulsin didn't wait for him to speak anyway. "Whatever happen' is the fault of the one who taught her so poorly. If you know anythin', you should tell us now and brin' that man to justice."

Kulsin's bulging eyes were fixed on his witness's, who just stared straight through him. The Kairnin at least had the grace not to point at Aulus as he invited Victor to name Lucia's murderer. The young man was firmly caught in Kulsin's trap, and Randall expected him to break down and tell Kulsin what he wanted to hear. In the end, truth won out, an odd victory considering that Victor had been lying only a moment ago. "I don't know of anything between Aulus and Lucia," the Acolyte said slowly. "I'd tell you if I did." Randall believed that.

Kulsin kept his eyes focused on his prey's a moment longer, then turned to the presiding Dominus. "I have no more questions for him."

"Very well," Marton, who ran the Senate this year, replied without standing. "Does the Accused have any questions?"

Aulus stood. "I believe the boy has suffered enough. I won't add to his misery."

"The witness may go then," Marton said. "Randall, will you take the Acolyte Victor to his quarters?"

Randall rose and went to Victor. Taking hold of his arm, he steered Victor out of the chamber. As soon as they were past the door, the boy came to a stop. "Is it true?" Victor asked. "Is Lucia dead?"

Randall glanced around. With the trial in session, no people wandered the hall, but even an empty public hallway was too exposed. He placed a finger to his lips, then led Victor down a side corridor, then another, then a third that ended in a blank wall. No doors led off the narrow, dead-end passageway. Aulus wrapped a protective sphere around them both to keep their voices from traveling.

"What's going on?" Victor asked, angry and grieving.

"Kulsin thinks your sister is dead. Aulus believes otherwise."

"What do you think?"

"I think that it is very important for Kulsin to believe Lucia is dead. I think he would kill her if he found her alive."

"So she is alive," Victor said, wiping damp eyes with his red sleeve. He took a slow breath. "What happened? Is she all right? Where is she?"

Randall lay his hand on the boy's shoulder, "I never said she was alive, and I will truthfully deny using that particular phrase if you tell anyone that I have." His eyes flicked back down the hallway, "I suggest you don't do that. Kulsin didn't send that Dominus to just talk with your sister. And I cannot tell you any more than that without putting you at risk."

"I don't care about that," Victor snapped.

"I do," Randall said calmly enough, considering the strain he felt. If this boy didn't keep quiet, he could destroy not just himself and Aulus, but Randall as well. "Aulus thought enough of you to risk himself for your sake. I'm not going to let your recklessness throw that away. Is that perfectly understood?"

Victor ignored the question, instead looking in the direction of the Senate chamber. "I've doomed him, haven't I?"

"No, you haven't. It was his choice."

Victor shook his head. "No, it was mine. He asked me to do it, which may make his actions noble and honorable. That does nothing to justify mine."

Randall had nothing to say in response to that.

After escorting Victor to the large wooden gates that marked the border between the Inner and Outer cities, Randall made his way back to the Senate Amphitheater. He slipped in quietly through a side door so that he would not disturb the proceedings, but the care seemed unnecessary, as the entrance of a Novar army would not have drawn attention away from the drama taking place on the floor. Aulus and Kulsin were both standing, red-faced and engaged in a shouting match. At the moment, Kulsin was drowning out Aulus. "Your disregard for the laws of the Domini have hurt us in the eyes of the world, not helped. It is your fault that we are unwelcome in Quian, forbidden from even enterin' Manuel's capital."

"My fault?" Aulus's voice rose to an even greater volume. "Quian hates us because you murdered dozens of innocents."

"I destroyed a Necromantic cult. There were no innocents there, no matter how youn' they were. You're the one who brought outsiders into the Order's affairs. They should never have witness' what we did there."

Aulus trembled with anger. Randall, taking his seat near the front of the Senate, thought for a moment that the Novar would launch himself bodily at Kulsin. When he spoke, however, his voice had returned to its normal tone. "This isn't about me, Kulsin. You know that and I know that."

Randall should have recognized it as a bad sign when Kulsin just let him speak. "This is about the Order. You and I each hate what the other represents. You want the Domini to remain the same, unchanged after seven hundred years. I believe the time has come for us to change. Whatever laws I have broken, I've only harmed the Order if you see any evolution as harmful."

Aulus began to move now, pacing back and forth. Kulsin stepped out of his way. Looking around, Randall could see the nearby Senators following Aulus with their eyes, hanging on his words. "We have decided that the way we are is the only way we can be. The only way we can perform our function. Thus we will Expel any one of us who threatens to change that, by teaching our skills to someone else, by telling an outsider about our affairs, by loving a woman. These things don't harm our Order, they help it. They make us part of humanity again, allowing us to identify with those we're supposed to be helping, actually doing something for them rather than watching from the shadows. What have we done to help the human race recently? In what way have we improved the lot of a single person? We don't feed the starving, we don't heal the sick, we don't educate the ignorant. The Philosophers may look down on the rest of the world, but at least they're not afraid to go out into it. Thousands have benefited from their knowledge and skill, as expensive as it is. Name one human being who is better off because we exist. We are so intent on protecting them from mythical enemies that we can't be bothered to care about the people we're protecting."

"And what of these enemies, Domine? What can you tell us about them?" Kulsin spoke softly, but he nearly bounced on his toes in excitement. Be careful, Aulus, Randall thought, certain that Aulus must see the insane look in the Kairnin's wide eyes.

His thoughts went unheeded. Aulus had been planning this speech for a long time, and he gave no indication he even heard Kulsin, though his next words addressed the question. "And what enemies are we supposed to be defending humanity against? No inhuman army has moved against any human state in centuries. Orcs, Kawyr, the mythical Malwer, all seem content to stay where they are." Aulus came to a stop in his pacing, near where he had started. "Humanity doesn't fear any of them as much as they fear us."

Kulsin stepped forward then, his smile revealing his victory more loudly than his words. "Aulus wants us to forsake our mission, abandonin' our defense of humanity in order to befrien' them. There's a reason why nations have professional armies. Even the Novar citizen soldier is more ideal than reality. The men who guard the welfare of nations need to be harder, stronger, better train' than those they guard. They need a ruthlessness, a willingness to kill and to die that would be dangerous amon' the citizenry. We are the soldiers of humanity. Aulus wants us to become soft and weak so that the world will like us. They don' need to like us, and only selfishness would make us think that it's more importan' than protectin' them. The greates' love we can show for our people is to not seek their love at the expense of their welfare.

"Yes, yes, Aulus will argue that we are not helpin' their welfare. We watch and wait for a threat that will never come. The time for waitin' has passed. This mornin', I received the news that the Orcish horde has return'." This morning? Kulsin had to have known for days. Randall vividly remembered how Kulsin had put off the trial for nearly a month, suddenly agreeing to this date only five days ago. That's when he must have received the news, somehow keeping it secret until now. "The Dominus bearin' this news has jus' arrived."

Nathan, a long-time ally of Kulsin, entered from a side chamber. Aulus didn't wait for his report before he spoke sharply, "How long have you known about this, Kulsin? It's just a little too convenient that you share this news now." So Aulus saw through the Kairnin's deception as well.

"Do you think I would hide somethin' this important from the Senate? If you're goin' to sugges' that, at least make a clear accusation. As I said, Nathan just arrived this mornin', an' he came to me so I could presen' him to the Senate. I admit I intended to wait for the en' of this trial so we could focus our full attention on his news, but it seems that it is relevan' to the trial as well."

"If the Orcs have returned, then it is more important than this mockery of a trial. Let Nathan speak." Aulus resumed his seat. Marton gestured for Nathan to speak as soon as he had done so.

The newly arrived Dominus went to the center of the floor and faced the assembled crowd. He looked tired and dirty, although his travails had left no mark on his robe. He waited for Kulsin's nod before speaking. "Two months ago, Dominus Kulsin asked a number of us to accompany the Novar army headed to the Austral Pass. Their commander, Proconsul Aurelius, believed that the Kawyr were planning an offensive, and he intended to seal the Pass in order to prevent it. Our agents had heard of this, and Kulsin thought it best that we go along in case the threat turned out to be real. Once we arrived at the pass, a patrol went through to investigate further. One of our own, Danil, went with them.

"While they were away, a Kawyr raid attacked the Novar fort, a very specific raid which targeted our means of communication, both mundane pigeons and more magical means." Nathan drew a Speaking Glass from around his neck and showed it to the audience. Something had shattered the half-orb.

"We learned why when the remnant of our patrol returned. They had encountered Orcs on their patrol, thousands of them, accompanied by dozens of warlocks. Fully half their men had died in the flight, Danil among them. The Orcish horde was heading for the pass. They didn't know the exact number, but they had discovered a cache with enough supplies for twenty thousand. Sosto, who led our expedition, ordered me to report to the Senate as quickly as possible. I came by the nearest Doorway, in Martia, to arrive here today, twelve days after I left the Austral Pass."

The assembled Domini had remained quiet during Nathan's speech. Now loud voices stirred among them, demanding action, asking questions, creating utter confusion. Kulsin walked to the middle of the floor beside Nathan, raising his hand for silence, which he got. "Now, Aulus, do you see that there is indeed a threat against humanity that we alone can face?"

Aulus stood. "I see. I see that you have taken advantage of this disaster to get your way. You kept critical information from us so you could use it for political advantage." Shouts and jeers rose from the assembled Domini, aimed at Aulus. Even Senators were shouting at him, some of them among those whom Aulus had counted as allies.

"What would you have us do, then? Nothin'?"

"No, we should do what is right. Here and now, that means fighting this enemy. However, we must not use it as an excuse to undo whatever small progress our Order has made in the past few centuries." They were fine words, Randall thought, but hopeless. Randall knew it, Kulsin had known it from the beginning, and even Aulus must know it by now.

Kulsin turned to face Marton, a light in his bulging eyes. "This trial is no longer the most important issue facing the Senate. I move for an immediate vote on Aulus's guilt or innocence. The issue is not whether he broke our laws: he's admitted as much. He merely argues that his lawbreakin' is somehow justified because there is nothin' to defen' agains'." He didn't need to state his opinion of that argument.

Aulus looked to the dais. "Kulsin is right, there is nothing more to debate. He believes that defending humanity, whatever it takes, is more important than caring about it. I believe in helping people, and yes, that means defending them, but it also means sharing our knowledge and our skills. We cannot serve them by destroying what is human about ourselves."

Marton said, "The advocates have spoken. We will now take the vote."

Randall's initial assessment had been right: Kulsin had already won.



The vote had been close, but enough of Aulus's support had evaporated with the return of the Orcs that Kulsin got the two-thirds necessary for a guilty verdict. For Aulus's crimes, the only possible punishment was Expulsion from the Order. Two guards escorted the convicted Dominus from the chamber. A moment later a hush settled on the amphitheater as the significance of what had happened began to sink in. The Domini did not Expel their own every day, or even every year. No Senator had received that sentence for at least a century, and never one as admired and respected as Aulus. Kulsin did not allow the moment to last, moving to claim the floor immediately. "Fellow Domini, we all feel the tragedy involved in judgin' one of our own, but the business of our Order must go on. The Orcs will not give us a chance to grieve."

Randall didn't wait for Kulsin to whip the crowd into a frenzy. Even Domini could be manipulated by a man like him. Certain that no one would miss him, he slipped out through the same side door by which he had entered earlier.

Leaving the Amphitheater, he headed in the direction of the prison. The trial and the subsequent news had lured everyone but himself out of the streets. Despite the mild weather--the weather was always mild on the island--the warm sunlight on his black robes caused him to sweat. Or that may have come the shame and fearfulness he associated with his upcoming interview. He avoided thinking about that by focusing on navigating the streets. Usually the eclectic collection of buildings both amused and impressed him. The Amphitheater, where the Senate met, and the Basilica, where much of the daily work of the Domini took place, matched the Novar model, with graceful columns and domes. The Library was invisible, its five floors burrowed beneath the Basilica. The Dormitories, where most of the younger Domini lived, had the utilitarian, brick design of the monasteries inhabited by the Manuelite priests. More common than the public buildings were the private homes. The Domini who had built them came from all over the world, so the buildings looked like they had been lifted directly from the four corners of the earth and transplanted here. From quaint Manuelite cottages to Novar villas, from squat Kairnin houses to turnip-domed minarets from the Sovereign Cities, the Domini had brought to life dwellings both familiar and envied in their childhood. Since the land allotted for each building had decreased with time, the larger buildings were invariably older. Particularly disconcerting was the weather-worn, deliberately simple cottage which dwarfed the newly-erected miniature palace which stood next to it. Even in the midst of all this confusion, the Order's prison drew the eye.

The smallest building in the Inner City, it had a single story built of black granite blocks. The heavy wooden doors had a similar color, not painted but hewn from some rock-hard, dark wood which had lasted for centuries. The building had only four small cells, each with a high window too narrow for a man to fit through. The Domini had never intended that their prison hold anyone for more than a few days, since they did not use incarceration as a form of punishment. While indiscretions might earn a mere censure from the Senate, all true crimes merited Expulsion. That lacked even a hair's difference from a death sentence, since the Domini hunted down and killed Renegades. Even the condemned received a chance to contemplate their crimes, so the Order always waited three days before carrying out their sentence. After that time, all Domini had the duty to kill the Renegade on sight. If the Domini seized the Renegade before then, he would be imprisoned here. Holding a magic-wielding Renegade for even a few days required something extraordinary. Eight simple obsidian pillars, no more than narrow cylinders, surrounded the structure. No Essence entered the perfect octagon marked as much by the black flagstones which surrounded the prison and formed its floor as by the obelisks. Like the ocean encompassing an island, Essence lapped at the structure without entering.

Still wondering what he would say to Aulus, Randall stepped between the black monoliths. He hesitated as he noticed that the door stood open. He would prefer it if no one knew about his meeting with Aulus. If he could come back later, speak to him through the window of his cell... Then Randall made out the barely visible black-robed form lying on the black flagstones in the shadow of the doorway. He rushed to the side of the fallen Dominus and threw back the hood.

It wasn't Aulus. He did not know whether he felt relieved or dismayed to find Yestal, one of Aulus's guards, lying there. He had the beginnings of a black eye and a knot on his head, but he'd survive. Aulus must have fought his guards physically. Leaving Yestal, Randall circled around the prison to find Jerod lying on his face within the octagon, seemingly unharmed aside from some scrapes. Aulus had neutralized him with magic. Once outside the prison grounds, he would have used a Circuit against Jerod, who had not yet reached the perimeter. Few Domini had the power to drive Essence through the octagon, a feat akin to making a river flow uphill, but the new Renegade did. Randall shook his head at the stupidity of the guards. One of them should have remained outside the octagon while the other escorted the prisoner within. Even if that one couldn't manage the trick of sending a Circuit inside, he could have maintained some advantage. Didn't they know the proper procedure? Then again, Jerod may have stayed outside and only entered once Aulus escaped and headed for the other side. Entering the octagon rather than circling around on the outside was even worse foolishness.

Aulus himself had vanished. Randall hiked up his robes and sprinted in the direction of the runaway's destination, certain that Aulus would be heading for the Hub if he was thinking rationally.

Randall had not gone far before he spotted the Renegade hurrying along one of the main boulevards. The young Senator assumed that the Dominus he had found was Aulus, since the figure had his hood up, an uncommon practice in the Inner City. Randall might have called out to him if he had not seen another Dominus heading in their direction. Instead, he forced himself to slow to a fast walk so he would not draw attention to himself or the fugitive. The stranger passed Aulus without a second look. By the time Randall could no longer see him, another Dominus had appeared. This close to the Hub, people came and went all the time, no matter what happened in the Amphitheater. Randall recognized this second Dominus as Seth, a young man who had only recently donned the black robes. Fortunately, Seth was in too much of a hurry to accost his former instructor, and Randall hoped he would not remember the encounter, lest he mention it to the wrong person. The odd chase nearly drove Randall crazy. He did not dare run or call out to Aulus where others might see. For his part, Aulus didn't slow or look back. More than once, Randall doubted it was even Aulus that he followed, especially when he turned aside instead of entering the Hub.

The oddest building among odd buildings, the Domini had built the Hub out of dozens of small domes connected to a large, central one by hallways like spokes on a wheel. These spokes had different lengths and spacings, and the domes varied in size. Scattered inside these domes, hundreds of Doorways led to towers all around the world. The cavernous central dome was even bigger than it looked, as it extended a whole story beneath the ground, where it held Doorways big enough to transport goods rather than people between major cities. The Domini sometimes called this the Chamber of Winds, as locations around the world tried to equalize pressure and temperature within that one room. Only a powerful Circuit prevented full-blown tempests from erupting. A walkway which circled the dome at ground level gave access to the spokes which connected to the smaller domes. Each of these domes contained a particular domain, a set of Doorways which might be in the same region, or might all be national capitals, or might all trade similar commodities. When distance did not matter, the Order felt free to group its outposts by other criteria.

The Dominus whom Randall followed skirted around the edge of the Hub before walking into the space between two of the outer domes. As far as Randall knew, there was nothing but empty flagstones there. Hoping it was Aulus he followed, he hurried after the black-robed man. A grinding rumble met him as he passed between the two domes. Following the sound around the left side of a third, even smaller dome, he arrived just in time to see his quarry disappear into the ground. Randall paused to stare at the gaping rectangular hole, where stone stairs led downward beneath the pavement. This could not have been here all this time: even in such a secluded area, a large hole in the ground could not go unnoticed.

Randall summoned a small globe of light and went into the darkness. The narrow stairs descended thirty feet before reaching an equally narrow hallway. As he set foot on the grey stone, a sudden blast of freezing wind cut through him. He wrapped his robe tight against the cold and pressed forward. Aside from the seams of the stone blocks, nothing marked the walls of the corridor, no niches, no sconces, no doors or cross-corridors. Beneath the cold wind, it smelled of age and stale air which had only begun to stir. Randall felt certain this hallway had been here centuries before the Domini had built the Hub right on top of it. He had begun to feel the weight of the stone pressing down on him when he reached a large iron door, just recently forced open. The small stone chamber on the other side, a room which must sit directly beneath the center of the Hub, contained nothing except Aulus and the Doorway from which the wind came.

"Aulus!" Randall shouted through chattering teeth. The Renegade turned around to face his friend.

"I hope you haven't come to stop me," Aulus said, speaking loudly to be heard above the wind.

"What are you doing?"

"I'm fleeing, of course. It's either that or face my death with dignity."

"Why shouldn't you choose dignity?" Randall asked. "You did a noble thing back there. Are you going to throw it away by running?"

"Throw what away? I didn't achieve a thing. Kulsin got what he wanted and all that's left for me is to die in disgrace."

A new thought occurred to Randall. He licked his numb lips before voicing it. "You thought you could win, didn't you? I thought you were sacrificing yourself for your nephew, but that's not it at all. You believed that speech of yours would somehow win over the Senate and vindicate you."

"That was too much to hope for, wasn't it?" Aulus said with a rueful smile. "Still, it was all I had."

"Don't do this, Aulus. If you run, you'll be remembered as a Renegade. If you go back now, turn yourself in, your ideals might live on."

"But I won't. I'm not cut out to be a martyr, Randall. For a moment there, I thought I'd have to be, but then I remembered this." He pointed to the Doorway. It opened into a dark room, lit only by the two glowing spheres accompanying the Domini on this side. Randall could make out nothing but a stone floor.

"Where does it lead?"

"To the truth. Do you have any idea how long I searched for this? Until I found it three years ago, I didn't even know for certain that it existed."

"That doesn't tell me anything."

"No, I suppose it doesn't. You know the legends of the Malwer. We call them that instead of demons and think we know something, while we really know almost nothing. Search our libraries long enough and hard enough, however, and you'll find something more, the location of their prison and the Doorway that leads to it."

"You mean this particular Doorway leads to the prison?" More than cold caused Randall to shiver now. "Have you... been there?" He whispered the last two words.

Aulus spoke as if he had heard Randall's whisper above the windstorm. "Not yet. You see, it's is one way. A ward on this side prevents any living creature from coming to the island. You can communicate with someone on the other side, but this Doorway can only send people to the prison. It can't bring them back."

"Why would anyone design it that way?"

"The other end lies in a keep watching over the prison. In the old days, we manned that keep. Any Dominus who went made a lifetime commitment to guard the Malwer. If ever the need arose for reinforcements, the entire Order could travel there in a moment, but anyone who went knew he had no means of retreat back here. And if the Malwer ever captured the Keep, they could not use it to launch an attack on us."

"You intend to go there now. Why? How can this prison help you?"

"I want to see the prison, to discover whether there's any enemy left to fear, or if we've lived for centuries frightened by a myth. If I can return with news that the prison is empty and the enemy dead, maybe we can put aside that fear and change the way we live."

"How can you come back if the Doorway's one way?"

"The prison is somewhere in this world, and I have an idea where. It may take years to find my way back, but I know I can do it. When I return, then I will accept the Order's verdict. Only I'll be able tell them the full truth before they kill me." A fierce smile broke out on Aulus's face, making him seem young despite the grey hair.

Randall had to admire him. He knew Aulus had no intention of accepting the Order's conviction; he still intended to win. "I should try to stop you."

"Thankfully you won't," Aulus said. "Can you reseal the stairway? I knew someone was behind me, so I didn't get a chance on the way in. Just place this Component in the Circuit that controls it." He constructed a simple Component that Randall had no trouble memorizing.

"Good luck, Aulus."

"You too." Without another word, Aulus let his globe of light vanish and stepped through the doorway. A spiral stairway leading upward appeared out of the darkness when Aulus reignited his glowing sphere. When the Renegade had vanished up the stairway, Randall went about the business of eliminating the evidence. He burned the memory from the room, even though he doubted any Dominus would find much: neither he nor Aulus had done much here. Then he headed back to the corridor, closing the iron door behind him. Just before he reached the steps, he heard bells clanging in alarm, signaling the Order's discovery of Aulus's escape.

Once outside he completed the Circuit which closed the opening. The top steps rose, stone grating against stone until they were level with the pavement, just eight parallel flagstones. Randall could no longer see the Circuit. In order to open the staircase again he'd have to place the Component exactly, without reference to the Circuit he was completing. He had never heard of any means to hide a Circuit, and he wondered how, and why, the early Domini had done it. As an added precaution, Randall wiped clean the memories around here as well. Satisfied that no one in the Order would be able to discover where Aulus had gone, he emerged from the maze of the Hub's exterior. Outside, Domini hurried in all directions with their hoods carefully lowered to show faces. He ran into Yestal almost immediately.

"Are you all right?" Randall asked, seeing his ripening black eye.

"Huh? Yeah, I'm fine. The Renegade slammed me into a wall, but I'll live. I'm luckier than Jerod."

"Jerod? What happened to him?"

"Didn't you hear? He's dead."

"Dead?" Randall stopped breathing for a moment. Jerod had been alive when he left him by the prison. He couldn't have misjudged that, could he?

"Yeah. We can't be certain what happened. I was out cold, and there's no Essence near the prison to leave memories, but they've examined the body. It looks like dark magic killed him." Yestal's voice lowered and became thick with his clipped Kairnin accent as he rushed ahead. "Aulus used Necromancy an' tore his soul clean from his body."


This 5,494 word chapter is an excerpt from a 90,110 word novel.

There were lots of interesting things in this chapter. I had to play out the end of Aulus's trial, and then do something with him. In the course of that, I showed a little bit about how the Domini work, introduced the concept of Voids--places which are devoid of the Essence which the Domini use for magic--even though I wasn't using the term yet. I also talked a bit about the Hub, which was a natural outgrowth of the concept of Doorways. Of course most of them would lead back to the Order's city, and placing them all in one building makes travel easier and keeps them more manageable. I'm still a bit uncertain of Aulus's departure to the Malwer's prison. I think it makes sense, but there are some things I intend to do in the revision that will come when I combine Fire and its sequel.

The most interesting thing in this chapter is a casual mention of the Necromantic cult which Kulsin destroyed thirty years ago. I was casting about for some specific point of contention between the two, and the different ways they'd deal with a threat like the Necromancers struck me as a particularly good one. I think I'd already played a bit with the concept of a society counter to the Domini which studied Necromancy, and one of the more interesting aspects of it is that it would have difficulty recruiting boys with the ability, what with the Domini snapping them up and likely noticing if they started to disappear, but the Domini might not even notice if someone started training girls with the ability. That developed into the Necromancers, and when Aulus and Kulsin started to argue over an encounter with them, I knew I had to write about that incident. Which I did.

Friday, January 13, 2006

Trials, Chapter 15 of Fire
The Rest of the Story: The whole of Fire can be found on my Writings page in PDF format, while the portion of the story that's been published on this blog so far is on this page.

Here it is, the next chapter of Fire. Here I finally return to Victor's point of view. Remember him? He's my main character. Originally, this, or something like it, was going to be my second chapter (or maybe my third). Of course, this was before I knew all the details about the conflicts among the Domini, or started a war between the Novari and the Orcs, or discovered that Lucia was developing her abilities early. So I got a little sidetracked along the way!


Chapter 15
Trials

Victor followed the Dominus. He did not ask where they were going, since an Initiate did not question a Dominus, but such prohibitions did not prevent him from wondering at the morning’s events. The Dominus had woken him up only a few minutes ago, well before his normal rising time, and simply gestured that he should follow. They traveled down a long hallway of gray marble walls and tiled floor, flanked by plain wooden doors on one side and tall, narrow windows of glass on the other. Though the sun had not yet risen, the sky had grown gray and Victor could see without the aid of the small globe of light which hovered near the Dominus’s head. The Initiate could have summoned a similar globe himself, but he could only practice magic with a Dominus’s permission, and his escort still had not said a single word this morning.

The black-robed figure that towered over him would have been imposing except for the ungainliness which the robes failed to hide. The hunched shoulders and plodding step did much to detract from the awe that Domini usually inspired. Most people would not have noticed, but Initiates spent considerable time with the Domini. Victor thought he recognized him as one of his instructors, but without ever seeing his face nor even hearing his voice yet today, he could not be certain. Any number of Domini could be tall and gangly.

The sun finally emerged, casting long shafts of light through the windows and causing Victor to blink in the illumination. A few figures began to appear in the hall, all students in robes of white, yellow, or blue, each color representing a different year. Victor had had lessons with all of them. At first his lessons had contained only white-robed students, then yellow began to predominate. Recently, as many of his classmates wore blue as yellow. He thought he knew the meaning behind this development. Having traversed the length of the hallway containing the sleeping cells, they left behind the sunlight and entered a maze of corridors which Victor had never explored before. He wondered briefly at his lack of curiosity, which he had never lacked for before coming here. Soon the only illumination came from the Dominus’s shining globe. They came to a stop before a door as plain as any of the others stretching down the corridor in either direction. The Dominus opened the door with magic, startling Victor, since he hadn’t realized that magic had sealed the door shut. He hadn’t seen it used for that before. With a gesture, the black-robed man indicated that Victor should enter. He did so with some trepidation at whatever secret required magic to guard it.

The room was even smaller than Victor’s sleeping cell, and completely void of any opening save the door by which they entered. Only the Dominus’s steadily glowing ball provided any light, a long streak from the door to the wall opposite. That door-shaped beam illuminated the only furniture, two plain wooden chairs facing each other across a plain wooden table. On the small, low-lying table stood a silver cup.

“Sit,” the Dominus said. Victor jumped on hearing the Dominus speak for the first time today. The Initiate did not hesitate to take a chair, and his guide sat down across from him, the glowing sphere taking up station above the table, where it brightened to provide as much light as a lamp tree.

“Drink,” the Dominus said.

Victor picked up the goblet before disobedience to the Dominus even occurred to him. In fact, from the time the Domini had brought him here, obedience to them had come so naturally that he had never questioned it. Now he hesitated. What did the cup hold? He stared at the clear liquid, then looked at the Dominus, who did not say anything but leaned forward in his seat, ready. For what?

Drink, came the urgent command. Though Victor didn’t know where it came from, it contained such force that he found himself tilting his head back to drain the cup before he could think about it anymore. The contents were tasteless and lukewarm. Just water, Victor thought, until the bitter aftertaste filled his mouth. Poison?

He waited almost patiently for some effect. The Dominus waited too, watching him without saying anything. After a few minutes, Victor began to think that it had not been poison after all.

“What did you give me?” he asked at last.

“Something to counteract the drug you’ve been ingesting for the past year, up until three days ago. It’s begun to clear your body, but this should wake you up now, ” the Dominus replied.

“Drug? What drug?”

“It’s called Redleaf. The Sovereign City of Maro makes a fortune harvesting it, unaware that we’re their largest customer.”

“What does it do?” Victor asked, his throat parched and his hands damp. An effect of the antidote?

“Redleaf has the powerful effect of making people more pliable. It doesn’t make them obedient, exactly, but it can make them... open to suggestion. When they are told something often enough they begin to believe it to be absolute truth. This is mostly true in general, but this particular drug enhances the effect. It also has the interesting effect of suppressing normal emotional responses. Or you could view this as an aspect of its primary effect: making someone susceptible to an outside influence requires muting his natural inclinations.” The Dominus paused, and his next words lacked the lecturing tone of a moment ago. “Do you understand what this means?”

“It means,” Victor said, “that you brought me here against my will and drugged me to keep me under control.” Anger had replaced fear, neither of which he had felt in the last year. They came like wind driving through fog, stronger for having been absent so long. Although he remembered the previous year, it felt like a dream, parts of it exaggerated while others had blurred. He could not recall the basics of his daily life, what he had eaten, where he had slept, who he had been. Bits and pieces came to mind, but no consistent whole. He could recall his lessons in uncanny detail, every word he had heard, every bit of magic he had imitated. It was as if he had gone to sleep the night of his coming of age and awoken here, this knowledge in his head and a year--was it a year?--gone from his life. The Order had taken him, filled his mind with this knowledge for their purposes without a care for what he or anyone else wanted. His family must think him lost, never to return. Could he return? A Circuit came to mind, a flow of magic which could burst the door apart. Another, which could kill, followed, a necessary condition for the first.

“Do you know why you are here, Victor?” the Dominus asked.

Victor paused, thoughts of returning home held in abeyance. He had to think before committing some insane act. Like murder. Trying to recall what the Dominus had asked, Victor answered, “I’m being trained.”

“For what?”

“I don’t know for sure. You’ve instructed me in magic. I’ve also learned about culture and history, the parts which only the Order knows. And I remember that you taught a class about dangerous creatures, ‘threats to humanity,’ you called them.”

“So I’ll ask you again: what are you being trained for?”

Victor knew the answer. He had already begun to suspect it, though he still hesitated to voice it. “You want me to... join the Order, to become a Dominus.”

“Exactly, Victor. You have the rare ability needed to become one of us. That is why we brought you here and trained you. It’s why we want you to remain.”

“You ‘want’ me to remain? Do I have a choice?”

“You always have a choice. Sometimes it’s not the choice you expect or particularly want, however.”

“What is my choice now?”

“You can decide to stay, to complete your training and become a Dominus. Or you can decide not to.”

Victor did not think he would be allowed to leave, whatever he chose. Most likely they would kill him if he refused to stay. He could try to escape, but what chance did he have? Even if he could get past this Dominus, more lived on the island. And “island” summed up everything he knew about where he was. He had no idea how to get off of it, or even which direction to go if he did. “Why should I stay?” he asked, thinking hard.

“Some stay out of duty. The Domini protect humanity from threats most people cannot even imagine. Some want knowledge. We know more about this world’s history and nature than anyone else, even the Philosophers. Others hunger for power. The Domini are feared and respected everywhere in the world. Most, however, become Domini for the magic. You have just begun to learn what you can do, just begun to see the world as only the magic can reveal it. Can you give that up now?”

He tried to imagine life without the magic and failed. Curiosity, ambition, and duty were all strong reasons, but they paled in comparison to the magic. Like a child learning to walk, the magic seemed strange and wonderful but natural and right as well. He could not go back to the mundane world where only his eyes saw and only his hands touched. “What price must I pay for the magic?” Victor asked, feeling his anger begin to drain. What price wouldn’t he pay for it?

Randall laughed, a chuckle that seemed more strained than cheery. “You’re bargaining like a Kairnin, Victor. Or a politician.” His mirth died out quickly. “A Dominus’s first loyalty is to the Order. We have the awesome responsibility to protect humanity from threats they do not even know exists. We cannot let other loyalties distract us from that responsibility. To become a Dominus you must give up all ties to your country and to your family.” The Dominus watched as Victor absorbed the severity of the price. “We likewise discourage friendships outside of the Order, and forbid Domini from marrying or fathering children, or even taking a lover. All these things divide loyalties and steal time. We are your only family and friends, now. If you decide to stay, that is.”

“That is a lot to give up,” Victor replied.

“Usually, Victor, an Initiate such as yourself would complete three years of training before this moment came. By that time, you’d have known for a year why we trained you. You’d have grown so used to the idea of becoming a Dominus that, even without the Redleaf, you would be eager to continue. You’ve lived here for less than a year, and you’ve had to figure out for yourself why we brought you here. I cannot expect you to make this decision easily, but you must make it now.”

Victor did not decide out of duty, or a hunger for knowledge, or a desire for power. Not even the pull of the magic decided him. He decided what he did because he knew that, whatever the Dominus might say, he had no choice. Those whom the Domini took never returned, so whatever alternative the Dominus seemed to be offering, it was not freedom. Victor wondered how many of the other students had stayed for the same reason; they could not have missed the obvious threat. “I’ll stay,” he said.

“Welcome, Acolyte Principius,” the Dominus said. He tossed his hood back, and for only the second time in his life, Victor saw what a Dominus looked like. It seemed impossible that the hood could have hidden such bright red hair. While long and somber, the man’s face wore a small, uncertain smile, which broadened when he reached out his hand and, after a moment of confusion, Victor took it. “My name is Randall,” the Dominus said.

Victor tried to grasp the significance of this Dominus dropping the mystery with which they usually shrouded themselves, giving his name and shaking hands as if with an equal. Victor’s own status had drastically changed, it seemed. “I’m an Acolyte? What is that?” he asked.

“Acolyte is the next stage in your training. You’ve committed to the Order now, so you will be trained in a different manner. You should learn much more rapidly from here on. Then again, you’ve learned very rapidly already, so maybe not.”

“You said that most Initiates have three years of training, while I’ve received only one. Why the difference?”

“As I said, you’ve learned very quickly. Your Philosopher tutor taught you many of the things in which we would have instructed you. Such an education leaves particular gaps, but we’ve filled most of them since you came. You’ve also learned magic more rapidly than any of our other pupils. To you, it seems to come... naturally.” The Dominus’s smile flickered and vanished. Victor tensed, realizing that something unusual was happening. Randall lowered his voice to continue, “Or as if you’ve been trained before.”

“I’m not sure I understand.”

“Aulus tells me that he has not taught you, and I believe him. He’s not the only one who could train you, though.”

“Train me in what? What does Aulus have to do with this? Does he know something about the Domini?”

Randall shook his head. “No, not your brother. Your uncle. He’s a Dominus.”

Victor nodded. Of course. The uncle of whom he had often heard, whom the Domini had taken, would have ended up one of them.

“That’s beside the point. What I want to know is what you knew of the magic before you came here. Did anyone instruct you in it?”

“No. How could they? I thought only the Domini knew anything about magic.”

“That’s mostly true.” Randall frowned at him, but when Victor didn’t say anything else, he said, “All right, I believe you’re telling the truth. You’re standing on dangerous ground, however. This should explain it better.”

Randall reached into a hidden pocket and drew out a glass globe, which he handed to Victor. The flawless sphere just filled the palm of his hand. Its light-bending shape distorted everything seen through it, twisting them all around a central point.

“Do you know what that is, Victor?”

“It’s a piece of glass,” he replied. Although there was nothing extraordinary about the shape or material, someone had bound a Circuit to it. It’s complexity overshadowed any Circuit with which Victor had dealt thus far, but he suspected that the Domini used far more complex Circuits on a daily basis.

“It’s more than that. Can you activate the Circuit inside?”

Victor could see the gap in the Circuit and make out the required Component with ease. A simple bit of magic completed it, causing Essence to flow through the orb. It began to flicker with red, green, and blue light, beams of which shot out and coalesced into an image above the orb, the head and shoulders of a man on a level with Victor’s own head.

The man looked straight through him. He looked much like Victor’s father, sharing the same bold nose and dark eyes that marked the Principii. When he spoke, the voice sounded similar, though hoarse and too loud.

“Victor, do you know who I am?”

“You’re--”

“My name is Aulus Principius. I’m your uncle.” Victor realized that the image could not hear or see him, so he kept his mouth shut. “It was I who brought you to the Order; you may have seen my face that night. You and your sister are causing no end of trouble for the Domini.” His sister? What had Lucia done? “Fortunately for you, the blame for that trouble will fall on me, but it’s already affecting you both. You were raised to Acolyte early because of it. I’m told that you are ready, but the Order has its own motivations for raising you this early. An Initiate has certain protections, whereas an Acolyte must accept many of the risks and responsibilities of a Dominus. The Senate will soon summon you to testify as to whether I taught you what you know of the magic. You must lie and tell them that I did teach you.”

“Lie?” Victor asked. He looked to Randall, who was also watching the image. The Dominus’s eyes had gone very wide, and he seemed to be whispering to himself. Victor only caught the word “crazy.”

The image continued, “I know that it is not in your nature to lie, especially in a legal proceeding, but you must. I’m not sure you understand what they suspect of you, although I’m sure Randall has told you the same thing as he’s told me, that you’re too good with the magic, too able. If they think that your talent comes from my teaching, they’ll blame me, but if it seems to come from some other source, they’ll go after you. The Order can be remarkably close-minded about such things. They’ll see the threat, not the good, that comes from your ability, and there will be an Inquisition which can only end in your death. If they believe I’m responsible, they’ll try to hurt me, but I’ll survive.” Aulus gave a brief smile. “Kulsin has been trying to get rid of me for years. If he can convince the Order that I taught you before you came here, they’ll probably force me out of the Senate with a severe reprimand. That’s as far as it’ll go. I have enough friends left that they’ll never get the votes to Expel me.

“The important thing to remember about the lie is to keep it simple. Say that for two years before we took you, I visited your home several times a month, but not on any regular days. I taught you the basics of the magic. If asked specifics, just mention the things you’ve learned here already. Seeing Essence, building Circuits, applying them to move objects and the like.

“Which leaves just one more thing. From now on, you have to learn slower. You can escape suspicions once, but you might not be so lucky a second time. If you just slow down from here on out, it’ll look like you’ve reached the end of your premature teaching and it should allay their fears. Good luck.”

The image fell silent, then vanished a moment later. Victor sat there with the globe in his hand, then said, “Did you know what it contained?”

“Not until now,” Randall replied. “I knew Aulus intended to do something to protect you, but not this.”

“He said he could survive this. Can he?”

“Teaching someone who is not an Initiate yet is a serious offense.” Randall licked his lips. “But if anyone can survive it, Aulus can. He’s been parrying Kulsin’s accusations since he was an Acolyte.”

Victor could tell that Randall didn’t lie well. “Who’s Kulsin?”

“Kulsin is a Dominus, a member of our Senate who is about a decade older than your Uncle. The two of them have very different ideas about what our Order is and what it should be. Aulus believes that we should do away with many of our ancient practices, while Kulsin believes it’s important to hold onto our traditions.”

“So they’re political opponents?”

“Yes, and more. There’s some very personal animosity between them as well.”

Victor had grown up hearing about the politics of Novaro, no matter how much his mother tried to shield him from it. His father had never tried very hard. Though he had heard stories of vicious struggles, even assassinations, he had never been a pawn in anyone’s fight before, nor had anyone ever asked Victor to betray him. The young Acolyte stifled a yawn, too tired to reason clearly. The mental and emotional strain must have worn him out.

The Dominus realized his plight. “The counteragent you’ve been given stimulates your mind briefly, but when it’s done it leaves you exhausted. Now is no time for you to deal with a moral dilemma. I should show you to your new quarters.”

“New quarters?” Victor asked.

“Yes. Now that you’re an Acolyte, your life will change significantly. The Acolytes live on the other side of the Outer City, in an area where you haven’t been allowed to enter before. I’ll show you where you’ll be living now.”

The Dominus did not give Victor a chance to go back to his old cell and get his meager belongings. Instead, he led Victor further down the hallway by which they had entered, the glowing ball of light still following, until they came to a wooden door at the end. Magic sealed this door as well. The Dominus unlocked it to reveal a room even smaller than the one they had just left, inhabited solely by a marble door frame in the center, two columns resting on a marble block and supporting a lintel. Sitting in the middle of the room, it should not have led anywhere but to the other side of the room. Instead, sunlight poured through the doorway, flowing from a brightly lit room Victor could see on the other side of it.

Randall sealed the door behind them and then spoke, “Some Domini think this is showy, a needless waste of resources. Others consider this an important rite of passage. It’s called a Doorway. Go ahead and take a closer look, just don’t use any magic.”

All thought of his tiredness gone for the moment, Victor went closer to the Doorway and put his arm through it, which went in without any difficulty, no different than if he had put his arm through a normal doorway. He pulled his arm back out, still not noticing anything unusual. He circled around the Doorway to find blackness filling the frame on the other side. He reached out his hand to put it through the frame again, but it would not go. Victor did not feel anything when he touched the blackness, he simply could not push his hand any further. Thinking of this, he noticed that the pillars were cut in half so that they appeared flat from this side. The lintel and the marble base ended at the same plane. It did not seem as though the Doorway would be structurally stable without the other half. Puzzled, Victor circled around to the front side.

Randall smiled at him, clearly amused at his behavior. “We developed the ability to make Doorways over seven centuries ago. It was then and is still our greatest innovation, allowing us to consolidate our Order in one location and giving us instantaneous travel and communication to anywhere we can place a Doorway. Our income comes from letting our agents around the world use them to transport goods more quickly and reliably than other merchants can. Of course, if we’re not careful to avoid overdoing this, we might reveal our particular advantage.”

“How do they work?” Victor asked.

“The basic concept is simple. Build an ordinary door frame, then magically reinforce its nature as a doorway. That part requires a complex process that only a few Domini really understand, but if it’s done right, you can cut the frame in half and it remains a doorway. You can place the two halves on opposite ends of the world, and traveling between them would remain as simple as stepping through an ordinary door.”

“Are there a lot of them?”

“We have hundreds of Doorways. Each of those towers we build in every large city has one. Most of them terminate on this island, in a central location, so we can travel from city to city through a single hub.”

“So that’s what’s in those towers,” Victor said.

“They also have a few sleeping quarters and some supplies, but mainly they give us a place to put our Doorways.”

“Where does this one go?”

“Just to the other side of the island, to the Acolytes’ quarters. Go ahead and step through it. Don’t use any magic while you’re doing so, though. That can disrupt the Doorway and break the link.”

Victor hesitated, then squaring his shoulders, he closed his eyes and stepped through. He had to open his eyes to confirm he was on the other side. He had not felt anything. Randall followed him, and Victor noticed that the accompanying light had vanished. “This way,” he said.

They left the room with its tall windows and quickly found themselves once again in inhabited hallways. It’s tiled floors and marble walls looked no different from those in the Initiates’ area. The students wandering the halls here wore red and brown robes, but Victor found the noise stranger than the colors. While Initiates only spoke to one another when necessary, several of the groups of Acolytes whom he and his escort passed appeared to just be chatting. Unlike the Initiates, who would hurriedly avert their eyes upon spying a Dominus, these young men often gave Randall a friendly nod which he returned. None of them asked about the white-robed Victor, however. Apparently even Acolytes did not simply address a Dominus.

Randall led him to a wall with regularly spaced doors and windows, flanked by a colonnade which opened up onto a courtyard, where he introduced Victor to his new room. While not large, it seemed spacious compared to his former cell. It was even bigger than his room in Novaro. The low-lying, neatly made bed occupied one corner, a small writing table and its straight-back wooden chair beside it. A clay oil lamp stood atop the table, and shelves already holding several books were mounted on the wall above that. Lying against the opposite wall was a chest of some dark wood, sitting on bare tile rather than on the rug of Manuelite design in the center of the floor. Victor most welcomed the window facing towards the courtyard, since his previous room had had no opening except the door, which had opened onto a similarly windowless hallway.

“You’ll find red robes in the chest. Go ahead and put them on. You have the rest of the day off, but tomorrow morning you’ll be called to testify at your Uncle’s trial.” As if he had not just told Victor that he faced a life and death decision tomorrow, Randall left him alone. The new Acolyte did not immediately don his red robes. The grogginess has set in again, so he lay down on the bed to rest for a few moments, which was all the time needed for him to doze off.



Victor awoke in the mid-morning, still feeling groggy from the drug. The sunlight seeping through the closed shutters had not awoken him, but the increasingly hot and stuffy air of the room had. Groaning, Victor rolled out of the bed and went to open the shutters. A cool breeze filled the room immediately, refreshing both the atmosphere and the occupant. Victor discarded any thought of going back to bed. His room, along with ten others just like it, sat on one side of a colonnaded courtyard which reminded Victor of the peristylium in his home in Novaro. Grass and a few trees filled the sunlit space. Students dressed in red and brown robes sprawled on the ground underneath, some reading while others apparently slept. An animated discussion had broken out among a group of three students, two in red and one in brown. Their voices carried to Victor, though he couldn’t follow their highly technical conversation.

Seeing their colored robes reminded Victor of his own white one. He headed over to the chest and opened it to find new boots, undergarments, several red robes, and a small wooden case. Victor put on the boots and one of the robes, unsurprised that everything fit perfectly. He opened the case next. Inside lay on odd quill pen and several sheets of parchment, but no ink jar. The lack puzzled him until he took a closer look at the pen, discovering that it held a complex Circuit which kept a small reserve of ink and dispensed it in a controlled manner. Even more interesting, the other end could be brushed against any parchment and absorb the ink upon it, replenishing the pen’s supply and erasing the writing on the parchment. Victor brought the pen and parchment to his desk where he experimented with it and watched the Circuit at work.

Once he had learned all that he could from the pen, he took down one of the books from above his desk and opened it. Complex diagrams illustrating advanced Circuits greeted him at once. Although he had seen bits of this notation before, he had never seen anything this involved. He spent some time trying to puzzle through one of the diagrams, sorting out what the different parts did. This proved time consuming, since whenever he came across a symbol he didn’t recognize, he had to rifle through the book’s pages until he found it. Then he’d spend long minutes deciphering how that Component worked, and even longer minutes figuring out how it fit into the Circuit. The whole thing began to give him a headache. If his uncle said he was so gifted, why was he having such a difficult time making sense of this?

Still hunched up over his desk, he didn’t notice at first when the bell began to ring. It took the sound of many people moving and the following silence to get his attention. He went to the window just in time to see the last red robe vanishing down a corridor. Victor vaguely recalled that a similar bell had rung to call the Initiates to lunch. His hazy memories of last year had nearly made him forget this highly practical bit of information. With a growling stomach reminding him that he had not eaten breakfast today, Victor hurried out the door and after the departing Acolytes.

He caught up with them and took a position several paces behind the last person in the informal procession, who turned to look at him then quickly looked away. Victor almost asked him what was going on, but he had become so accustomed to the silence of the Initiates that speaking now seemed awkward. The other Acolytes had no such difficulty, and they sounded boisterous to Victor’s ear. He had forgotten what casual human socialization felt like. It should not have surprised him to experience anxiety rather than eagerness at his return to it. He had never been comfortable around strangers, and after being an Initiate for a year, nothing seemed stranger than these unaccountably loud Acolytes.

The bell had been a call to lunch after all, and Victor filed into a large dining hall with the others. Like the Initiates, the Acolytes came from all over the world, from every province of the Novar Empire, from Kairn, from the Sovereign Cities, and, most often, from Manuel. Those in red and brown robes freely mingled. While their ages varied, most seemed older than him, if not by much. Over fifty students gathered together here, less than half the number of the Initiates, and they didn’t come close to filling the room. The vaulted ceilings and tiled floors, lit by windows high in the walls, gave the massive room an uninviting feel. Victor joined the line leading up to a window connected to the kitchen. A slave there handed him his lunch, a tray containing a bowl of soup, some cheese and fresh bread, and a cup of wine. Aside from the wine instead of water, he thought the meal resembled what the Initiates ate. It was plain fare compared to what he had eaten in Novaro, but better than what most of Novar Plebeians ate. Victor watched the other Acolytes take accustomed places at the long tables. He had no place here, so he took a position near the end of a table, several seats down from the nearest person. No one seemed eager to talk to him, and he could not work up the courage to approach any of them. It didn’t take long to realize that they had no qualms in talking about him. Of course they had noticed a newcomer to their ranks. Those just a few seats from him tried to be subtle, but he noticed the glances cast in his direction which quickly turned aside when they saw him looking back, and the voices which dropped as the topic of conversation shifted. Those further away did not hide their curiosity as well, looking and pointing and talking, sometimes whispering, sometimes not. He only caught bits, “white robes”...“less than a year”...“Principius’s nephew”...“testify at the trial”...

Victor hunched over his meal, trying to pretend he wasn’t there. He had never liked the public attention he had received as an Imperial prince, and this was even worse. He hurried through his meal and waited for his fellow students to lose interest so he could leave unnoticed. They never did, so after a while he simply stood up, letting the tray lie where it was, and left.

Back in his room, Victor shut the door and windows, preferring a stuffy room over curious stares. He opened the book he had been studying before, but found himself unable to concentrate on it. Standing, he began to pace back and forth, a mere four steps in either direction due to his limited floor space. He had always hated being the center of attention. No, that was not entirely true. Like anyone else, he had enjoyed praise, had even gotten annoyed when his accomplishments went unnoticed. On the other hand, he had liked to slip into the background whenever he had wanted, to only receive attention when he had allowed it. He had not felt this way during the last dreamy year, but with the Redleaf gone, he found he had not changed much. The sort of attention he now received, unsought, even undeserved, disturbed him as much as it ever had. The averted eyes and whispering behind his back would drive him as paranoid as Aulus. His brother, not his uncle. He did not know how paranoid his uncle was.

Which brought him back to the more important question. The elder Aulus had asked him to lie, to perjure himself in a trial so he could protect his own skin by condemning his uncle. Aulus Principius might want to make the noble sacrifice, but that didn’t make Victor’s part in it any less ignoble. Victor had never thought of himself as the virtuous hero, but he had always believed himself a decent person. Lying to protect himself while sacrificing his kin went beyond immoral. It sounded like the improbable plot of some tragic play, where the audience eagerly awaited the anti-hero’s painful demise at the end. How could his uncle have put him in this dilemma? Victor shook his head angrily. Why did Victor think he had to help his uncle, anyway? He had never even met the man, whom the Domini had separated from his family almost forty years ago. Yet his political fights had thrust his nephew into this uncomfortable position among the Acolytes. If Aulus Principius had told his nephew to lie, why should Victor feel obligated to find a better way? He certainly didn’t owe his uncle anything. Then again... how certain was he that his uncle did want him to lie? The young Acolyte only had the floating image and Randall’s word as evidence. What made him think that Randall really was Aulus Principius’s friend, rather than an enemy out to destroy him with his nephew’s testimony?

Victor was still pacing when the bell rang for supper. Though his stomach rumbled and his legs ached, neither persuaded him to go and face the Acolytes’ scrutiny again. Instead, he continued to pace across the same patch of floor even as the light leaking through the shutters began to fade. By then he did not need the light to know the number of steps between the walls.



Victor fought back a yawn as he entered the indoor amphitheater early the next morning. The Senate almost never called Acolytes to testify before them. They had not even permitted an Acolyte to enter the Inner City in over decade, and then they had executed him rather than allowing him to leave--hardly a reassuring thought. Victor hoped no one here wanted him dead, but he didn’t feel hopeful. If my Uncle’s right, the only thing in my favor is that this Kulsin’s more interested in killing him than me, he thought grimly.

Randall conducted Victor to stand at the right of the raised podium which faced the Senate and its audience. A single Dominus, a gray-haired gentleman with a well-trimmed beard, sat in a chair on the dais behind the podium. About fifty men, whom Victor assumed to be Senators, sat in the four rows of curved stone benches arranged in a semicircle on the amphitheater floor. Randall took a seat on the front row near the center. Aulus Principius had a seat on the front left, between two Domini who must be his guards. On the front right sat an elderly, mostly bald Kairnin with bug-like eyes. Behind them sat the remaining Senators in uneven groupings of unknown political meaning, and behind them rose several tiers of seats, holding space for at least a thousand observers. Domini occupied every seat, their hoods tossed back so their diverse origins stood out. Sun-darkened Kairnins looked lighter next to the black skin of the Daurentian nomads from the Novar Empire’s northwest desert. The pale skin and fair hair of the grassland dwellers from the more eastern northern reaches of the Empire could not have looked more different. Victor wondered why people living in neighboring regions had such different looks. The southerners seemed roughly similar in comparison. Though the few who looked distinctly Novar had darker complexions, only a fellow Novar would have noticed them among the Manuelites or citizens of the Sovereign Cities. Despite the variety of faces, the black robes gave them a frightening uniformity of appearance. He could not help feeling self-conscious in his red robes, as obvious as a cardinal among crows.

A low murmur had moved through the spectators and the Senators themselves when he had entered, but the gray-haired Dominus on the dais brought silence simply by standing. “The Acolyte Victor Julius Principius has been called to testify by Dominus Kulsin of the Restal. Acolyte, you have been summoned to give your testimony before the Senate of the Domini. To speak falsehood here is to forfeit your life.” Aulus didn’t tell me that, Victor thought. From what his uncle had told him, telling the truth would kill him too. “Domine Kulsin, you may ask your questions.”

The presiding Dominus returned to his seat as the aging Kairnin Senator rose from his. He took several measured steps towards Victor, stopping only when he stood much too close, where he could look down on the Acolyte.

“Your name is Victor Principius?” he asked.

“Yes,” Victor answered, as clearly as the tightness in his throat allowed. The Dominus loomed over him at an angle that let him see the hairs in his nostrils. He turned his eyes towards the assembled audience, resisting the insane urge to giggle.

“You are the son of Marcus Julius Principius, the brother to the Novar Emperor an’ heir to the throne?”

“Yes,” Victor intoned, wondering whether the Emperor had really named his father as the official heir.

“Then the Dominus Aulus Julius Principius is your Uncle?”

“Yes,” Victor said. He recognized the repetitive questioning as a lulling tactic, and not an impressive one for such a supposedly deadly political opponent.

“Have you seen this Dominus before today?”

At least the questioning had turned serious. “Yes.”

Kulsin’s bulging eyes went very wide as they focused on Victor. “Tell us about the las’ time you saw him.”

“I saw him when I was... taken.” Victor had almost said “kidnapped.” “His obscuring illusion slipped and I saw his face.”

Kulsin grimaced, the unpleasant expression making his face even more gruesome. Victor knew better than to congratulate himself on his little dodge, which had done nothing to help matters. Kulsin leaned over him, so that his wide-open eyes came very close to Victor’s own eyes, which only force of will kept from blinking. “What about before then? Did you ever meet Aulus before that time?”

Lie.

“What did you say?”

“I said,” Kulsin replied, “did you ever meet Aulus before you were taken? Did he reveal himself to you? Tell you about the Domini or--” Kulsin pulled himself up short before he gave Victor’s testimony for him.

You must do what Aulus told you and lie!

“But who...?” Victor fell silent. Hearing voices had to be a bad sign.

“Aulus! We’re talkin’ about your uncle Aulus! Stop tryin’ to avoid the question!” Kulsin looked furious, his dark skin flushed and his bug eyes nearly falling out of their sockets. He did not raise his voice, though it became sharper. “Did you meet this Dominus before your comin’ of age?”

Victor no longer tried to meet Kulsin’s eyes, instead looking towards his uncle, who sat without moving except for what Victor thought was a slight nod. Lie, lie, lie! came the emphatic command inside his head.

Looking down at Kulsin’s tightly woven sandals, Victor spoke his uncle’s death sentence, “Yes.”


This has been a 6,953 word chapter of a 90,110 word novel.

This is a low point for Victor. Okay, so he's only had two chapters, but still! The main reason I put him through this is I wanted to give him an early experience of shame and failure. This will haunt him. Nor do I think it will be the only such failure that will. The other reason for this is that I wanted him to finish up his training early, with a two year break between the end of Fire and its sequel, rather than the four years it would normally take to finish Dominus training.

Saturday, December 31, 2005

Runaway, Chapter 14 of Fire
The Rest of the Story: The whole of Fire can be found on my Writings page in PDF format, while the portion of the story that's been published on this blog so far is on this page.

Wondering what happened to Lucia? Well, you're about to find out.


Chapter 14
Runaway


She pushed the ragged blanket lower, trying to cover her overlong legs. That feeble effort only left her exposed elsewhere, and her tossing and turning only made her awkward body more miserable. The steady pattering of the rain nearby reminded her to be grateful for what she did have, a little shelter at the entrance to some Patrician’s townhouse. She considered the damp stone beneath a small enough price for a roof overhead. The household slaves would have chased her off by now if the rain had not made their vigil lax. It drove away other people, too, men with dark thoughts on their minds. She had chosen her shelter with more care since she had awoken to find that hairy man stroking her arm. His gap-toothed smile had vanished when he saw that she was awake, and he had fled as if from a demon. She hoped he was still running.

More than anything, she wanted to go home, but it was the one place she could not go. She did not think she could explain what had happened in a way that would convince anyone. Marjori would never believe such nonsense. Marcus Principius neither tolerated lies from his slaves nor trusted them to tell the truth. As for Avla... if the guards had spoken truly, then Avla wanted Jaelin returned, and as long as the slave girl could still talk, the guards would not be out-of-line if they made her a little more pliable. She thought she must have done something magical in order to escape, as the guards had strangely lost interest in her. They had not noticed when she fled.

Lucia remembered seeing Jaelin die, but somehow she was Jaelin now. When she tried to remember what had happened, she could recall nothing more than her momentary envy of Jaelin’s lost life. Lucia had wanted her anonymity, her life removed from concerns of politics and magic and Domini, her maturity and worldly knowledge, even her exotic beauty. Then, Lucia had changed. Her body had become Jaelin’s, stretching and shifting to be older, stronger, inconveniently taller. She had Jaelin’s features, her freckled face and red hair. Even her voice had changed, though it still didn’t sound like Jaelin’s to her ear. Inside, she was still Lucia.

Unless she really was Jaelin, and her belief that she had once been Lucia was mere fantasy. She shied away from the fearful thought of madness.

The envy seemed silly now. Jaelin was a slave; how could Lucia have forgotten what that meant? Slaves had no rights, and Lucia’s apparent death would fall on her slave girl’s head. Now they were searching for Jaelin, and since Lucia had no idea how to become Lucia again, that meant they were searching for her.

Her stomach growled, reminding her that she had not eaten anything since the apple she had stolen this morning. Even that had been a feast compared to the discarded scraps on which she had survived for the three days previous. She did her best to ignore the hollow pain in her belly, the cold and damp of this evening, and the aches that came from sleeping on hard ground for the last ten nights. She lacked even the single coin to pay for entry to the public baths, and her body itched with the resulting dirt. Drawing herself into a tight ball, she blinked the tears from her eyes and wished for sleep so she could forget these things for a few hours. Her fear of the dreams kept her aware for a long while, however.



Struggling to wake from a dream where she watched her own body, her real body, writhe as fire consumed it, Lucia opened her eyes. For a moment, only dim grey light filled her vision, and heaviness suffused her whole body so she couldn’t move. She opened her mouth to cry out, but only a small whimper came. Fighting, struggling, she managed to get her finger to move, then her hand, then her arm. She pushed herself to a sitting position, her heart racing and her breath coming in short gasps. Real, physical terror had replaced the dream terror of a moment ago. She searched for the source of her distress, and finding none, she realized that her body was behaving normally now. It ached, itched, felt cold and sore, but none of that differed from when she had fallen asleep. The groggy head and blurry vision completed her morning routine. Did what had just happened have something to do with magic? The thought that someone had placed a spell on her frightened her less than the idea that she had done it to herself by wearing someone else’s body. Maybe, no, surely, it had only come from being only half-awake.

Though the rain had stopped, dampness darkened every surface in the dim light of dawn. Lucia shivered in the chill of a morning even colder than the night. The rain had washed out the normal city smells of garbage and food and smoke, of men and animals and their waste, scents she would hardly have noticed had they not been diminished. She saw no one in the narrow street except for a slave boy on some early errand. Although he glanced at her as he jumped over a large puddle, he did not slow, in too much of a hurry to be bothered with the problems of some strange girl.

The unnerving experience of a few moments ago renewed her determination to find her quarry today. It could not be that difficult. Even though she still hesitated to approach him in some public place, Lucia had no intention of losing him again for fear of being caught. She draped the dirty blanket around her shoulders like a shawl as she got unsteadily to her bare feet. They hurt with cuts and bruises which marked her bare feet and legs all the way up to the knees her tunic failed to cover. It might have once fit Lucia perfectly, but it did not fit Jaelin well at all, who was not only taller but also older and more developed. She wished she could have found a tunic that fit better. The blanket shawl at least hid some of the places where it had ripped. For once, she did not want a mirror; she had a good enough idea of what she must look like. Once moving, Jaelin’s long legs carried her faster than Lucia’s would have. It suited her to walk quickly, since her legs didn’t feel as awkward when she hurried, but it exacerbated the pain in her feet and made it even more difficult to avoid the filth and shards which littered the road. Her cut and dirty feet demonstrated how not even the raised stepping stones made the streets of Novaro safe to travel barefoot. She felt exposed, even all alone in the early morning city. Especially when alone. She walked even more rapidly, certain that faster had to be safer.

She did not know where her quarry lived now, since the fire had scattered the entire household. Lucia knew that he had not joined her parents in the Imperial palace, and that he had an apartment somewhere which he had tried to keep secret from her parents. Whether he was now staying there all the time or not, he probably still went there on occasion. Lucia just had to find it. She had followed him the other day, almost to where she thought his apartment must be hidden. Lucia might have approached him publicly if the others hadn’t been following him too. The intentness which had radiated from them had told her that they were not just walking behind him. Though she didn’t know them, they might have recognized Jaelin, so she had kept her distance. Lucia had hoped that she could approach her quarry after his tail had grown tired of the chase, but when he had lost them, he had lost her as well.

Lucia reached the point where he had disappeared last time, then stopped since she had nothing else to go on. No people shared this narrow street with her this morning. She looked around, half-hoping he would appear, and when that failed, she searched for places into which he might have vanished. The whole area had an air of disrepute. Several ungainly tenement buildings supported one another, while a few warehouses clustered near a larger street at the end of the block. None of the buildings were short, and the protruding upper stories threatened to cave in. A fountain splashing tepid water into its basin was the sole public structure around here. Why would he choose this place in which to hide? He had a paranoid need for secrecy, but what could he be doing that would require a place on this street?

Lucia noticed the alley on her third pass across the same stretch of road. What she had taken for a recess between two adjoining tenements was a twisting alleyway, just wide enough for a person to walk through. She stepped inside, feeling like a rabbit going into a ferret’s hole. The alleyway made two sharp turns in quick succession before opening up into a wider stretch flanked by several doors. Lucia sighed in relief when she felt his presence, guiding her unerringly to the third door on her left, which looked no different from any of the others. Raising her hand to knock, she hesitated. He wouldn’t recognize her, likely wouldn’t believe her. What made her think he could help her when no one else could? She was on the verge of turning away when the door opened.

Lucia’s brother looked worse for the wear. Aulus had not bothered to straighten his twisted tunic, and his tousled dark hair and the bags under his eyes did nothing to help his already sickly appearance. Lucia wondered whether he might really be sick. At the sight of her, however, his eyes lit up and unabashed relief filled him. “Finally!” he said. He took hold of her arm and pulled her roughly into the apartment. After a brief look outside to make sure no one lurked in the alley, he shut the door.

Aulus had kept his bedroom at home spotless, everything in its proper place. The clutter of this apartment, while not excessive, did not fit him at all. Scattered papers shared a low-lying table with a single lamp, the only light in this windowless room. A toga draped over the couch, and a lone sandal lay on the open floor. The small stove must provide heat, and perhaps a place to cook. Lucia didn’t see a bed, but the curtained doorway indicated another room. Unless it was much larger than this sparsely-furnished room, the entire apartment could have fit in the atrium of the destroyed townhouse. Aulus didn’t give her much chance to explore. “Where have you been? I expected you days ago.” Rather than continue, he took her firmly in his arms and kissed her.

Alarmed and repulsed, she pushed him away. As his confused eyes met hers, she found herself looking straight into his brown irises rather than up at them as she once had. With the realization of what Aulus saw, Lucia began to understand.

“What’s wrong?” Aulus asked. Her brother and Jaelin? She had thought they didn’t even like one another. How had they managed to keep it from her?

“I’m not Jaelin,” she said.

Aulus just looked at her in confusion.

“I’m not Jaelin,” she repeated. “I’m Lucia.”

“What are you talking about?” Hurt and disbelief coursed through Aulus, barely noticeable beside the rising panic.

“The Dominus came for me. He killed Jaelin, and I... killed him. Then, somehow, I became Jaelin. I don’t know how, or how to change back. I couldn’t go home. Who’d believe me? And Mother is hunting for Jaelin, and the Domini are searching for Lucia, and you’re the only one I--”

“Hush,” Aulus said, hugging her gently. Lucia could sense real compassion in the midst of all the grief and fear, but it all gave way to the hard edge of his skepticism.

“You don’t believe me, do you?” she said into his ear.

Aulus pushed her back, his hands on her shoulders. His face had turned hard and unreadable; his mind had vanished entirely. Unlike the Dominus’s blank wall, which she could feel even when she could not read what it hid, this seemed more like Aulus wasn’t there at all, even though she could still see and hear and touch him. “How can I believe you? You look like Jaelin, you feel like her.” He pinched her arm, though not hard. “You even sound like her. But you’re not acting like Jaelin.” He frowned. “You could be lying, but I think you believe what you’re saying. That doesn’t make it true, though.”

“You think I’m Jaelin and I’ve gone mad.”

“Whoever you are, you’ve been through a terrifying experience, and you’re coping with it as well as you can.” He looked her up and down. “That’s the most reasonable explanation I can think of. As for what you believe happened--I don’t even know whether or not it’s possible. I can’t rule it out entirely.”

“You’re hoping I am Jaelin, aren’t you? You’d rather have her than me.”

For a moment, she could sense him again, grief and fear, hope and desire, and underneath it all a bitter amusement that was distinctly Aulus. All of it vanished in a moment. “I hope? What is there to hope? Either I lose a sister or a... friend. I had reconciled myself to losing Lucia, but Jaelin had vanished too and I was afraid I had lost her--you--as well. Now you’re telling me I had it backwards. Do you expect me to be happy? Madness or magic, which should I prefer?”

Lucia had not allowed herself to dwell on Jaelin’s death. She had avoided any thought of those awful moments of magic, fire, and death, though they came to haunt her dreams anyway. For the first time, the raw truths of what had happened caught up to her. Jaelin was gone. Her constant companion for most of her life had died because of her. Shuddering, heaving cries seized her. Aulus placed his arm around her awkwardly and led her to the couch, where he sat her down. He took a position on the disorderly table across from her and waited for her noisy sobs to subside. It took a long time, as memories of Jaelin flitted through her mind: The red-haired girl comforting her as she cried over some trifle. Jaelin’s panic when she had touched the fire. The two of them with their heads together, foreheads almost touching, conspiring to slip out of the house before Marjori could find them. Jaelin had often counseled caution, but when Lucia had insisted on doing something reckless, she had always come up with the how. Lucia would have to figure out the how for herself now. When she looked up, sniffling and wiping tears from her eyes, she found Aulus watching her. She thought she had seen him wipe his eyes earlier, but now he just watched her with a quizzical expression. “You don’t cry like Jaelin,” he said. “She rarely cries, and when she does, she fights the tears every moment.”

“You still don’t believe me, though.”

“No, I don’t,” Aulus said. “Although...” He shook his head. “We need to talk about what we should do.”

“What about it?”

“First, you should put on some decent clothes. There are some in the bedroom. You could use a bath, too, but that’ll have to wait. Why don’t you get changed?” The thought of changing out of the rags she wore now had never seemed more appealing. She hurried to the bedroom while Aulus stoked the stove.

The bedroom had the same dishevelled appearance as the rest of the apartment and Aulus himself. Bed coverings lay in a heap on the floor, leaving the scandalous bed, large enough for two people, bare. A few of Aulus’s clothes lay scattered about as well. A shuttered window probably looked out on a courtyard. She didn’t open the shutters, instead going to the cabinet against the wall. Inside, a partition divided it into two sides, one occupied by Aulus’s clothes and the other by a woman’s clothing. Stripping off her torn and dirty tunic, she put on the best of what lay in the cabinet. She had forgotten what clean, comfortable clothing felt like. The perfect fit seemed odd after wearing the undersized tunic for days. She could tell that these clothes must belong to her slave girl, and any doubts she still had about the relationship between Jaelin and Aulus vanished. Lucia shuddered to think what her father would think of it.

She fingered the fabric of the dress she had put on. Something seemed odd about it. While not as fine as what she had worn as an Imperial princess, she didn’t think it’s low quality was what bothered her. Without a mirror, she couldn’t see what she looked like, so she tried to picture herself in it. No, to picture Jaelin wearing this dress. Lucia realized the she had never seen her slave girl wear anything like this. Jaelin had more often than not worn a simple grey tunic, shorter than her mistress’s. Aside from being full length, this dress had a light blue color. No slave wore dyed clothing. What had Jaelin and Aulus been up to? Lucia longed to hear Jaelin’s explanation. Wiping her suddenly blurry eyes, she wondered whether she could ask Aulus. Would he give her an honest answer? Could she tell if he didn’t?

Lucia returned to the other room, more comfortable in body if less so in mind. Aside from straightening up some, Aulus had also heated water and laid out some food. He gave Lucia a warm, damp cloth. She accepted it gratefully and tried to wipe her hands and face clean, watching in alarm as the cloth went from white to gray. “At least now it’s dirtier than you are,” Aulus said, giving his usual smile at another’s embarrassment. Discarding the cloth, she tentatively began to eat the food in front of her. Bread, cheese, and fruit made up a typical Novar lunch, along with a cup of almost cool water. She sat down on the couch and began to eat, focusing on the fruit since she had found that bread and cheese upset her stomach if she had not eaten in a while.

“What now?” she mumbled to Aulus around an apple.

Aulus stood above her, watching her eat. She still could not sense him. “I had intended to take you with me. You—Jaelin—and I discussed this,” he said. “At length.” He had apparently convinced himself that she was Jaelin.

“With you? Where?” Jaelin had intended to leave? Why hadn’t she told her mistress? The hurt Lucia felt engendered guilt. How could she take offense at something her dead friend had done?

“If you can’t remember, I probably shouldn’t tell you. You might say something to someone you shouldn’t. After what’s happened, I can’t bring you with me anyway.” He paused, waiting for her to say something. Lucia was afraid to ask why she couldn’t go with him. She didn’t want to go with Aulus, not when he still believed that she was Jaelin. Would his doubt stop him from...? She pushed the thought from her mind while Aulus answered the unasked question. “The people who would have helped me to hide you before won’t now that Mother is hunting for you. They’d just hand you over to her. I think I can get you out of Novaro, but you can’t come with me.”

Lucia took a drink of water so she could speak. “Well, what about Grandad? I thought maybe I could stay with him. It’s a long way from Novaro, but that’s a good thing. It’s out of the way, so I don’t think the Domini or anyone else who’d be looking for me go there very often. And if anyone can face down a Dominus, it’s him.”

She still couldn’t sense Aulus, but she knew she had said something right when he smiled and said, “That’s brilliant! Mother would never think to look for you there.”

“Mom...” She had a sinking feeling. How could she forget that her grandfather would mistake her for Jaelin just like everyone else? “Grandad would tell her he had me, wouldn’t he?”

“No, no, no. He dotes on you, remember?” At Lucia’s confused look, he slowed down to explain. “Your parents belonged to him before they died in the Agnatius Rebellion. He raised you himself. We stayed with you and Grandfather for a year when you were six and I was seven. Lucia must have been two or three. You two took an instant liking to one another... You really don’t remember this?”

Of course she didn’t remember what had happened to her at that age. As far as Lucia could remember, Jaelin had always been there. Now that she thought about it, her grandfather had always welcomed Jaelin as warmly as Lucia when they visited. The two also spent considerable time alone together. They hadn’t visited him often, but Lucia should have paid more attention to Jaelin’s relationship to him. Only, why would anyone want to know about a slave’s life?

“Why did Jaelin leave?” Lucia asked.

Aulus looked at her for a moment, before saying, “You and Lucia both begged him not to separate you. He let you go with her, but he still owns you. You’ve told me before that he intends to free you when you’re twenty.” Aulus frowned. “I never understood why he let you leave, or why you wanted to go. You were both happier before. It always struck me as one of Lucia’s whims, when everyone went along for no sensible reason...” Aulus trailed off at her expression. “Sorry, I forgot.”

The words gave Lucia something to think about. She didn’t want to admit that Aulus was right, but Lucia realized now that she had almost always gotten her way. She had believed that her abilities were new, but maybe instead she had just become aware of what she had always done. With that realization came a depressing thought. When people were kind and accommodating to her, did they do it because they liked her or because she made them? Did people really like her at all, or had she somehow coerced them into acting as if they did? Even Aulus would hesitate to manipulate people the way she did without thinking.

Her brother didn’t seem to notice the sudden attack of self-doubt. “Would you like to visit the baths? I’d hate to say that you need one, but...” He gave another of his mocking smiles. “We can go to the small one close-by. While the regulars might remember us, none of them know who we really are.”

“Yeah,” Lucia said, her mind on more disturbing things. “That would be nice.”

The public bath turned out to be the more disturbing thing after all. Aulus hadn’t told her about the mixed bathing.



Over the next few days, Lucia actually missed living on the streets. The food, clean clothing, and warm bed did not make life with Aulus tolerable. He did not approach her, or even talk about his and Jaelin’s previous relationship, but when she could sense him she knew that what he felt for her was not brotherly affection. He had convinced himself that she was Jaelin, and nothing that Lucia said could change his mind. Only his knowledge of her “madness” stopped him from pressing her. Fortunately, Aulus spent much of the day elsewhere, working and, she believed, plotting. She pretended to sleep when he came home late.

Just hiding in the apartment from the Domini, the guards, and anyone else who might be looking for her quickly lost its appeal. It would have helped if Lucia had anywhere to go. She did not want to wander around in this sort of neighborhood, even to visit the small forum a few streets over. Without any money, she couldn’t do a great deal of shopping anyway. Aside from that small marketplace, only tenements and warehouses stood nearby. And the bath.

That place both appalled and fascinated her. She imagined what her mother would say about Lucia bathing with both men and women. Avla had a most unNovar dislike of public baths in general; she herself only bathed in the private bath which Lucia’s father had commissioned for her. At first, Lucia too had been mortified at the idea of mixed bathing. Gradually, the casualness of the nudity had caused her to relax. It was not the orgy some of the rumors made it out to be. Mostly, the customers came from the poorer citizenry, and they had larger concerns than shared bathing facilities. The stern proprietess forbade any physical contact between the sexes, and bouncers stood ready to enforce that rule. Lucia found it curious that the men felt more self-conscious than the women, though they hid it behind forced nonchalance. The baths offered scant refuge, however. Even though she started to recognize some of the regulars, she couldn’t carry on more than the most trivial conversation. Between her own embarrassment and her awareness of their self-consciousness, Lucia couldn’t manage to talk to the men at all. She took to going to the baths early in the day, when mostly women filled the various pools.

With no one to talk to and nothing to do, she spent much of her time alone with her thoughts. Lucia would have much preferred either to distract herself from these difficult ruminations or to talk with someone about them, but she had neither option available. She may not have had anyone with whom she could speak when she lived out in the streets, but at least she had something to do, namely surviving. Now she could only think. Jaelin’s death, the Domini, her abilities and her unconscious use of them, the relationship between her brother and her slave, Aulus’s conviction that she really was Jaelin, her mother’s hunt for the young slave girl, her grandfather’s connection to Jaelin--all these things haunted her thoughts. She spent many hours letting them chase each other around in her head until it ached. Then, exhausted, she’d lie down and sleep, only to awake in the night, the thoughts still there. Lucia spent a great deal of time sleeping, hoping to escape them, but usually they came back in her dreams.

Dreams of fire came the most often, the flames always hungry for someone. The Dominus, her father, her mother, Aulus--they all cried out in agony from within. When she saw a tall, red-haired girl in them, she didn’t know whether it was Jaelin or herself. Sometimes the blaze consumed Victor. His suffering was worse than all the others combined. He didn’t cry out, instead looking at her with pity and hurt. Lucia woke from that dream more quickly than any of the others, only to find that the memory of it faded more slowly.

When Aulus announced that he had come up with a way for her to slip out of the city, she couldn’t leave soon enough. She didn’t have to wait long, since his arrangements required her to flee that night. After a flurry of packing, she found herself wandering through dark and empty streets with Aulus drawing her almost at a run. Like Aulus, Lucia wore a dark cloak with the hood drawn up, sure to draw suspicion had anyone seen them, but her brother proved adept at avoiding notice. They hid in the doorway to a large townhouse as two watchmen passed within a few feet without spotting them. Then they were off again, through narrow streets and even narrower alleyways, following a winding route that covered twice the distance as a straight line. It took nearly an hour to reach a point near the city walls.

The sky had begun to lighten to the dull grey of false dawn. A sputtering street lamp provided enough real light for a fat merchant to hitch his wagon to two reluctant donkeys. He must have lit it himself, as no other lamps showed signs of life. The merchant smacked one donkey on the nose when it tried to bite him, muttering either to it or to himself.

“Raxtus!” Aulus hissed from the alleyway by which they had approached. He tossed his hood back to let the dim light fall on his face. The man spun around, his hand clamped around a short sword he had at his waist. Lucia couldn’t imagine a man that large being able to use one effectively. What sort of merchant wore a sword, anyway? His eyes looked much too small in that wide face, although his large nose fit it well.

“Oh, it’s you,” he grunted. He didn’t sound happy to see Aulus.

Aulus replied, “Be glad it’s me and not the guards. Besides, did you think you’d be able to leave without my help?”

“I thought I might give it a try,” he said, drawing closer. His worn traveling cloak draped over a stained tunic.

“You wouldn’t make it.” A slight smile touched Aulus’s lips. “You’re kind of hard to miss, you know.”

“Not all the guards can have a description of me, no matter how remarkable I look.”

“I was thinking more along the lines of remarkably large, but...” Her brother radiated confidence, enough that he could risk insulting the man like this. “All the captains have your description, and no junior guard would let you leave this early without waking his captain.” Lucia realized Aulus was enjoying manipulating this fat merchant, certain that he had full control of the situation. Fortunately, Aulus judged correctly. For all his bluster, the man reeked of resignation. Lucia wished that were all he reeked of. Sweat and sour wine made a poor perfume.

“If getting out is so hard, how do you intend to get me past the guard?”

“I’ll go with you to the Septimian Gate. I know the officer on duty there tonight, and he’ll let you through.”

“And they’ll stop hunting for me? You promised me that.”

“Tomorrow, the paperwork to renew your case will get lost. When descriptions get circulated next month, yours won’t be among them. I would wait another few months before coming into Novaro again, but after that...”

The man grinned, showing more holes than teeth. Lucia wondered whether he could even eat solid food. “Well, if you’re offering me that, I suppose it’s worth the price, boy.” He looked at Lucia for the first time, trying to see into her hood. “I suppose this is the cargo.”

“This is your passenger. Her name is Marcia, and that’s all you need to know.”

“What story should I tell? My young wife?”

“Say she’s your daughter. I expect you to treat her that way--if she doesn’t get word to me that she’s safely reached her destination within two and a half months, I’ll track you down again.”

“Can’t you trust me not to harm the young woman? You know I’m no highway bandit. Besides, you’re not giving me much time to get her there so she can send a message back.” As odd as it seemed, Lucia sensed the sincerity of his words.

“No, not a bandit, just a smuggler. Take good care of her.”

Raxtus retuned to the donkeys, who seemed none too happy for the attention. For a moment, Lucia thought she could sense what the animals felt, but she had other things on her mind. “You’re sending me with him?” she whispered to Aulus.

“Raxtus is harmless,” he assured her. “A small time smuggler who ran afoul of one of the Agnatii. Since he’s so concerned with someone spotting him, he’ll do his best to keep both of you away from places where you might run into trouble.”

“Or he might sacrifice me to save himself!” Lucia said. She didn’t really believe it, though. Smuggler caught in a tight place he might be, but she couldn’t read any betrayal or deceit in him.

“Sacrificing you will only bring something worse, and he knows it. I would make his life a waking nightmare,” Aulus said as if such words were comforting. How could he be so skeptical of everyone else, yet so confident in his own wild plans? Before she could stop him, he leaned close to give her a kiss on the cheek. “Let’s go,” he said, pulling her to the wagon. Lucia’s free hand twitched. If he had tried to kiss her lips, she would have slapped him.

The first part of Aulus’s plan worked without a hitch, and by dawn she and Raxtus had travelled a mile past the Septimian gate. The smuggler watched her out of the corner of his eye but remained silent. While she could feel his matter-of-fact lust, at least he thought her off limits. Lucia just hoped that her life was improving since the day she found Aulus. She feared that it was getting worse.


This chapter is a 5,559 word excerpt of a 90,110 word novel.

One thing that surprised me was Jaelin's and Aulus's relationship. It hadn't occured to me they might be lovers until after I killed her off. Once I found that out, I began to wish she was still around so I could develop that further. Alas, that was not to be, and I had to live with the consequences of my actions.

Friday, December 16, 2005

Aftermath, Chapter 13 of Fire
The Rest of the Story: The whole of Fire can be found on my Writings page in PDF format, while the portion of the story that's been published on this blog so far is on this page.

As you may have already realized, you're not reading the final version of Fire. If you go read the PDF, you'll seem some differences, mostly grammatical and stylistic corrections, but also the occasional changes in dialogue or character's thoughts as I sorted out difficulties both with characterization and with way the world is set up. The problem was when I went looking for Fire, the version I found was an old one, not the one on the PDF. I've now located the final revision, hiding in a backup directory, but since I've posted the old one so far, I'll continue to do so. The differences really are minor, and this way I think it's more internally consistent. If you want the final version, you'll have to read the PDF.


Chapter 13
Aftermath


“You should be glad that you’re not human.”

“That goes without saying,” Talnek told the witch as she dabbed her foul-smelling concoction on his face. He had no doubts about Mitveh’s abilities, but he also knew that his wife’s best friend had come more to keep an eye on him than to fix his hurts. Anyua had insisted that Mitveh accompany him when he had ordered her to stay behind to advise their son. Talnek frowned at his wife’s spy, and said, “Is there any particular reason you’re thinking of?”

“A human would probably scar from this wound,” she answered, her fingers working the salve into the cut. She had assured him that the painful burning sensation meant that it was working.

“Scar? What do you mean?”

“Sometimes injuries leave a permanent mark on a human’s body. They don’t seem to be able to heal completely.”

“Just one more reason why we’re superior to them,” Talnek grunted, wondering whether he meant it. He had never expected such a fierce battle. Despite being outnumbered ten-to-one, the humans had fought like... well, nothing natural. Like one of those machines the philosophers used when they studied the stars, complex collections of gears all working together perfectly. These Novari had fought like that: organized and disciplined. The king wished he had brought goblins with him to wear down that engine; as unreliable as they were in battle, he’d sooner depart with a hundred goblins than one Orc. The Novari had cut apart hordes of Orcs, holding formation even in the heat of battle with a calmness that had to come from intense training. He had not seen anything fancy about Novar swordsmanship, but their methodical use of swords and shields had proven effective. The whole thing had unnerved to Talnek, which probably explained his rashness.

“So what possessed you to battle that last human one-on-one, anyway? You nearly got yourself killed,” Mitveh said. Her words irritated him more than her salve.

“I wanted to see if these humans were as good as a fully-trained sul warrior. They weren’t.” Individually, their technique had surpassed that of a well-trained an-sul, but it did not measure up to the sul. That last human had been another matter. His armor had marked him a commander, perhaps even royalty among these humans, and his guard had fought hard to protect him though he himself hadn’t shied away from bloodshed. He had led his small contingent to the thickest part of the battle, where they fought from horseback until their steeds wore out, then jogged in full armor when the horses failed. Like the rest of the calvary, they had worn full breastplates rather than the banded armor of the other soldiers and used smaller shields. The commander had lost his shield along the way, instead holding his sword in both hands. Though it had almost twice the length of the short swords used by the footsoldiers, the blade had moved like lightning. Talnek had struggled to make contact with his scimitar, and his dirk had proven unsuitable to parry the human’s powerful blows. In the end, the human’s exhaustion rather than the king’s skill had done him in. He must have fought over a dozen skirmishes, while Talnek had been forced to use his sword only twice earlier.

With a groan, the king got to his feet, knocking over the stool on which he had been sitting. Mitveh tsked him, but let him let him go since he was as bandaged as she could get him. He wanted to look over his men at the tasks he had set for them. At least twice as many Orcs had died has humans, although they had slaughtered them all in the end. Perhaps they should have given the humans the opportunity to flee instead of walling them in with warlock magic. Talnek wanted to believe that these Novari would have run if given the chance. The southern barbarians always broke when the battle turned against him.

The afternoon sun shone in the king’s eyes as he headed in the direction of the ruined wall. Gar appeared at his side before he had gone twenty paces. The warlock’s red robes trailed through the blood-spattered slush as he limped along, leaning on a staff as tall as himself. He had waited for Talnek to leave the witch before approaching him. The king didn’t think that Gar really feared Mitveh, or anything else for that matter, but while he went out of his way to tweak the other witches--something his mere presence did with ease--he avoided her. The warlock didn’t say anything and Talnek refused to speak first, so they walked in silence until they came to the wall. A gaping hole stretched about two hundred feet on either side of the twisted, half-melted iron strips which had once barred the gate. Only blackened rubble remained of the wall’s massive stone blocks there, nothing larger than the size of an Orc’s fist. Beyond the area where the warlocks had brought devastation, the undamaged wall stretched in either direction. Only a few Orcs remained on the east side of the wall, where Talnek had ordered the camp set up. Not enough order had returned to the army to see the job done yet. Those troops he had managed to bully into submission now pitched the camp or dragged off bodies to the pyres burning in the west, but many still pawed over the empty Novar fort in hopes of loot. Picking their way over the rubble, the king and the warlock found a chaotic jumble of soldiers on the other side.

All around them, sul and an-sul shouted to their king, while only his fellow warlocks greeted Gar. Talnek waved back to his bloody troops. Gar acknowledged no one. The frenetic celebrating among the Orcs gave no hint of the heavy casualties they had suffered. Those not still searching for loot celebrated with drinking, singing, and those incessant drums which had begun to give Talnek a headache. The king couldn’t help smiling. Victory should be enjoyed, and anyone who minded should just keep his mouth shut, whether he be king or warlock. He gave his silent companion a sidelong look.

“What do you want?” he asked Gar finally.

Gar gave a slight smile, as if he had gained some advantage. “You know what I wanted. You should have let us destroy them.”

“We did destroy them.”

“No, you and your soldiers butchered the humans,” Gar hissed. “You wouldn’t let the warlocks do more than watch.”

“You neutralized the Domini, didn’t you? You blasted a hole in their wall, kept them from fleeing with a wall of fire.” The blackened ground where their burning wall had stood still smoked. “Isn’t that enough?”

“That was child’s play. With over three hundred warlocks fighting in this battle, we could have razed this place, burned every single human to ash without risking a single Orc. Instead you lost, what, thirty thousand Orcs? You threw away over a third of your vanguard to take this place.”

“Could you have done that? With the Domini?”

Gar shot him a sharp look. He obviously hadn’t realized how much Talnek knew about the trouble the Domini had given them. The king had his sources, even among the warlocks. “They were more trouble than we had expected, but we handled them. Just three times their number would have overwhelmed them. We had thirty times.” Talnek wished he could tell when Gar was lying, wished he knew what odds the warlocks needed to match the Domini. Even so, he didn’t say anything. He thought that Gar had told the truth as far as it went, but the Domini had inflicted heavy casualties among warlocks and soldiers both before Gar had rallied his peers. His actions during the battle gave him primacy of place among the warlocks now. His political health had returned quicker than his physical health, a mere ten days since the unfortunate encounter which had nearly ruined them both. Talnek had ambivalent feelings about that: though he respected Gar’s abilities, both magical and political, he didn’t trust him.

“Magic is no way for anyone to die, even a human,” Talnek said.

“And what is a good way for a human to die, a dirk through the belly?” Gar had apparently heard about Talnek’s duel. “A hacked-off head? More importantly, what’s a good way for an Orc to die?”

Talnek spun on him, glaring into those dark eyes, his hand wrapped around his sword’s hilt. “A victory by magic would have been an empty one. Every Orc in the army would have muttered about it.”

“So it’s better to have two happy Orcs than three unhappy ones, especially when the missing one is an-sul?”

Idly, Talnek wondered how Gar could get his math right in the middle of an argument. “So is that what this is all about? The an-sul versus the sul. Sul died in this battle as well, you know.”

“What, two hundred, three hundred, a thousand? What’s that compared to twenty-nine thousand an-sul?”

“There are more an-sul than sul in this army, damn you!”

“Not that many more. An an-sul is three times as likely to die.” Talnek didn’t bother to work through the math, which he knew Gar would have gotten right. “How do you justify feeding them to these Novari for the sake of sating a little bloodlust?”

“Have you ever seen unsatiated bloodlust, warlock? It is an ugly thing. For an Orc to stare at a detested human and be denied the chance to vent his rage... I’d love to watch your beloved an-sul turn on you when you tried to protect them from the nasty humans.” Talnek knew he should control his temper. He disliked throwing away the lives of the an-sul as much as Gar did. Maybe more, as Gar had never convinced the king that it was compassion that had motivated him to proclaim himself the defender of the an-sul. Talnek had to deal with harsh realities, however, of which the way of war was just one. Angry or not, he had spoken plain truth, and he suspected that Gar knew it just as well.

Fortunately for both Orcs, a commotion broke out among the pyres at that moment. The Orcs had been burning the human dead in a separate fire from their own, and the shouts came from the direction of the human pyre. Both Talnek and Gar spared another moment to glare at each other before turning together and hurrying in the direction of the fire to the south of the fort. Talnek quickly outpaced the warlock, who could only manage a limping trot.

He had neared the edge of the human fort, beyond which he should have a clear view of the pyre, when a sul rider came galloping around the corner. The king held up his hand, shouting “Halt!” The sul looked at Talnek, and then his eyes, already as round as wagon wheels, went wider as he kicked his horse even harder. Talnek stared stupidly at the rider until the dull pounding of the pony’s hooves caused his spine to shiver. He just had time and sense enough to leap out of the way, directly into the stone wall of the fort. He heard a shout over the ringing in his ears and saw a flash of yellowish light through the blurriness in his eyes. Dull pain roared through his entire skull, centered at the point of impact on his forehead. He knew the pain would sharpen as the initial numbness faded. When his vision cleared, he saw Gar holding the pony’s reins, the Orc who had been riding it lying on his back. Talnek’s first instinct was to strangle the warlock for attacking one of his soldiers. That the soldier had tried to run him down didn’t seem to matter. Then he heard again the shouts and screams and remembered why he had come. This time he could tell that Orcs were dying. He forgot about Gar and his would-be trampler, instead rounding the edge of the fort to face a myth come to life.

In the midst of the fire stood a beast of which Talnek had often heard but which he had never seen. The huge lizard-like creature had a long, sinewy neck topped by a narrow head more graceful than any lizard’s. Its equally long tail twitched about almost spasmodically, knocking several Orcs aside. Yellow eyes glared at the soldiers around it while its massive claws shifted, searching for firm footing among the burning bodies. Great scaled wings fluttered above its head, waving about awkwardly as it sought its balance. The beast stretched at least forty feet, though most of that length was in its neck and tail.

Those Orcs with the sense to run had already left the scene. As many as five or six lay torn and crushed on the ground, one still screaming weakly. Only an-sul remained here, their only sul supervisor lying supine behind Talnek. An an-sul commander was yelling at the other Orcs, trying to rally them to fight the beast, but the monster apparently took note of his shouting. A claw tipped with talons nearly a foot long lashed at him, tearing through his armor and transforming his commanding yells into pain-filled shrieks. At that, some of the other Orcs turned to flee, while the truly clever among them held absolutely still.

Gar came along beside him, dragging the pony which had nearly run him down and saying, “Your less than respectful horseman still lives. Until you decide to execute him, any--” He stopped short when he saw the beast. The pony whinnied in fright. Not taking his eyes from the dragon, Gar reached out to stroke the pony’s nose, somehow managing not to gouge the horse’s eyes out in his distraction.

“Do something, warlock!” Talnek yelled as Gar came beside him, still dragging the pony. He immediately regretted raising his voice as pain flared through his head.

“What?” Gar asked, his voice calm despite the look of amazement in his wide eyes. His usual perfect control, Talnek thought.

“Use your magic, of course. Surely you can drive this beast off.”

“Warlock magic is fire magic, Your Majesty.” Gar never used that address except sarcastically. Of course, Talnek didn’t know of many Orcs who did use that form of address with respect. “That, if you haven’t noticed, is a dragon. Fire is not particularly effective against dragons.”

“Then give me that horse!” Talnek snarled, snatching the reins from Gar’s hand. He pulled himself into the saddle and just sat there until the throbbing behind his eyes subsided; then he drew his sword, wondering what spirit had possessed him. The pony showed more sense and balked until Talnek’s kicks and curses forced it into a run. He hadn’t gotten far before smoke began billowing from the flames, not ordinary smoke, but an inky black substance which gathered around the dragon’s head. It shook its head, trying to get free, but the cloud of smoke clung to it, growing larger and thicker by the moment. The dragon roared in fear, leaping into the air with its powerful wings beating swiftly. It seemed almost as startled at this as the Orcs, and its flapping lost its rhythm as the beast crashed to the ground, crushing several an-sul. Having lost its hold on the dragon, the black mist swirled in the wind of its wings before dissipating.

Talnek had closed the distance, the heat from the fire warming his face and the stench of burning flesh filling his nostrils. He cut his horse across the dragon’s exposed tail, striking at it with his sword. The blade bit into the scaled flesh no more than a few inches, and Talnek didn’t wait around to make another slice. He twisted his horse to take him clear of the tail, ducking as its length whipped through the air, just inches above his aching head. The dragon’s head turned on its long neck so that it stared directly behind itself at the fleeing king. Talnek pulled his horse about, raising his sword with a shouted challenge that made his head ring so much he feared he would black out. The dragon twisted its body around with more speed than such a large creature should have possessed. It roared as it surged forward to meet its adversary. Talnek put his heels to his horse, knowing that he could not expect to outlive this charge. One of the an-sul, shaken from his amazement by this interplay, lifted his crossbow and fired. The bolt struck the beast’s neck and ricocheted harmlessly from its scales, but other Orcs also remembered their weapons now. They began pelting the dragon with a rain of crossbow bolts. A ball of flame joined the bolts to flash in the beast’s face, causing its head to snap back though it had not done any visible damage.

With a roar that sounded almost Orcish, the dragon lifted itself once more into the air. For a moment Talnek, feeling the driving wind from its unsteadily beating wings, thought it would topple from the sky as his unchecked charge passed underneath, crushing him. However, it banked a circle around its tormentors and then lofted higher. Even on the ground it had looked graceful. In the air, its beauty struck Talnek silent, fortunately cutting off his victory cry before it split his head open. The green scales refracted the light of the afternoon sun, nearly blinding the king. It beat its long wings, shaped somewhat like a bat’s but longer and more graceful, and wider than the dragon’s length, then struck out southward.

Gar caught up to him as he watched it. The king didn’t turn away until he saw only a shining dot, waiting for the warlock to say something. When Gar seemed unwilling to share his thoughts, Talnek spoke instead, “Well, what was that? Yes, I know it was a dragon, but I thought they dwelt in the East, not here.”

“It seems you were wrong,” Gar grimaced at him, then admitted, “I didn’t know they would be here either. I never thought I’d see a dragon. That one wasn’t full-grown, and it didn’t seem to know much magic.”

“Dragons know magic?”

“So I am told. The older ones do, anyway... much more than any mere warlock. I wonder how old he was? Not yet a century, certainly. Maybe less than half that.”

Not old, only a century? How long do dragons live? Talnek wondered. He said, “I don’t care how old he was. What I want to know is where he came from. What was he doing here?”

“Perhaps we should ask,” Gar said, gesturing to the an-sul milling about. Dead and injured Orcs intermixed with burning human bodies, while the uninjured looked around dazedly, showing little sign of mental activity. The king and the warlock accosted one of the few trying to assist the injured. He had a loaded crossbow in one hand, and his eyes kept looking skyward for the return of the dragon. Curiously, they flicked toward the fire almost as often.

He seemed ready to fire at the king and the warlock as well until Gar spoke, “Hail. What come here?”

“Big beast. Kill Orcs,” the crossbowman responded, lowering his weapon.

“Where from?” Gar asked.

“From fire,” the Orc said, gesturing at what remained of the blaze.

“But where before fire?” Gar asked, impatient.

“Be-fore? Come from fire,” he replied, waving his crossbow at the fire and accidentally loosing a bolt. Fortunately, it struck one of the burning humans, narrowly missing a writhing Orc close by.

“Did you see the dragon arrive?” Talnek asked. “Where did it come from?”

The an-sul gazed at him in bewilderment, then gestured again with his fortuitously emptied crossbow. “From fire. Beast come from fire.” He looked at the two of them shrewdly, then leaned forward to whisper, “Fire-lizard.”

Talnek sighed. “He’s not exactly a fount of information,” he said to Gar. “Let’s see if we can help some of the wounded.”

They did their best to aid the survivors until the witches arrived to take over. When they had the opportunity, they asked more questions, but none of the an-sul had seen the dragon before it landed in the midst of the pyre. The sul supervisor had not awoken, and the witches didn’t think he would any day soon. No other sul admitted to seeing anything.

“If I didn’t know better, I’d say it came from the flames,” Talnek told Gar in frustration.

“Dragons are not spontaneously born from fire,” Gar responded. “No matter what some of the less reliable stories say. This wasn’t a newborn, anyway. Most likely it saw the fire and was curious: dragons are attracted to fires like moths.”

“Too bad it doesn’t burn them like it does moths.”

“Bite your tongue, Your Majesty.” Only Gar could lace that respectful phrase with so much venom. “Dragons are not our enemies. There are stories of cordial relations between Orcs and dragons.”

“This one wasn’t friendly. Most of the stories I remember don’t consist of cordial relations.”

“He was young, and probably confused and frightened. Relationships with dragons are as varied as the creatures themselves. They are fiercely independent, and will deal with Orcs, humans, Kawyr, and even stranger creatures as their own opinions dictate. They may enjoy the company, or they may decide we make better dinner than dinner guests. On the whole, though, they seem to prefer lower animals for food. They’d rather just avoid intelligent creatures.”

If you can call humans intelligent, Talnek thought. “Well, the next time we run into any dragons, I’ll let you do the negotiating. Hopefully he’ll find you a better conversationalist than I do.”

“Do you really think we’ll encounter more of them?”

Talnek snorted, “For all I know, these mountains are full of them. Curse those Kawyr for convincing me to do this.”

“On that, you and I are agreed,” Gar said, meeting Talnek’s eyes and holding them.

“Do you really think the Kawyr intend to betray us?” Talnek asked. He had heard this argument before.

“I think they are using us, as they have used us before,” Gar said. “And I think you are too much under their influence.”

“So you think they control me? I should kill you for making that accusation,” Talnek said, his voice low.

“I think that they may have access to the same geas as the druids, though to a lesser degree. I have spoken to some of the Muirthin who have met them.”

Talnek was smart enough to consider the possibility. It might explain why the Kawyr always seemed to win any argument he had with them. He was much too smart to admit his uncertainty to Gar, though. “I should like to see how you deal with them.”

“So would I, if they would deign to meet with anyone other than yourself.”

“I shall discuss that with them when we meet next,” the king said as he turned to go. They had promised to meet him the night after the battle. The Kawyr had odd opinions of when the meetings should occur, never appearing when he expected, but they had kept their word so far. Talnek knew he would see them in a couple of hours. He did not look forward to it.


This is a 3,943 word excerpt of a 90,110 word novel.

Thursday, December 1, 2005

Envoys, Chapter 12 of Fire
The Rest of the Story: The whole of Fire can be found on my Writings page in PDF format, while the portion of the story that's been published on this blog so far is on this page.

For this next chapter, we return to Gaius's point-of-view. Events are moving quickly now.


Chapter 12
Envoys


The Novar column cleared the forest just as the sun dipped behind the mountains. They had marched through the night and the following day since the Dominus’s sacrifice. His head bowed over his saddle, Gaius barely noticed the sudden brightness of open sky as he drifted in and out of consciousness. On top of the incredible weariness of days without proper rest, he had begun to feel ill yesterday, head aching and eyes burning. The setting sun cast long shadows from the mountains, though the army still had over a day’s march to reach the pass. Gaius shivered as they passed under one the shadows and reluctantly lifted his head to look around. He had noticed the ground rising steadily for the past several hours as they moved from the forested lowlands to the foothills of the Kainin. The rains which promoted such growth in the forests below simply washed away the good soil here, leaving myriad stones ranging from the size of his fist to the that of his horse. A few hardy grasses, greener than those found on the western side but otherwise identical, found root in the patches of earth around the exposed rocks. While Kawyr villages occupied the foothills elsewhere along the mountain range, none were this far south. A rough trail led from the pass to the forest, but Gaius quickly realized that they were not on it. The surrounding hills blocked out any sight of it until they topped a rise and he could make out the winding path miles to the south. He tried to call to Paulus, but his voice came out as a whisper, so he simply gestured to him. It took several minutes to get the new centurion’s attention, but he came over promptly once he noticed his tribune’s summons.

“We should make camp,” Gaius rasped. “Set guards as you can, but I doubt we could manage fortifications in this state.” In the past thirty-six hours, they had halted only three times, and at each stop they had rested no more than two hours. Even the most disciplined and healthy soldier would have trouble going further. Doing so might kill the wounded. The tribune’s training rebelled against not building a fortified encampment, but he didn’t think the men had the strength. “Tomorrow, we’ll strike southwest.”

“Should we allow fires?”

Gaius gave that as much thought as his fevered brain allowed. Regular Novar patrols traveled down the path to the forest, so a fire might bring help. On the other hand, if Orcs followed them into the foothills, they could see the fires as well as the humans. “Not tonight. Maybe tomorrow.”

“Yes, Commander.”

As soon as a few soldiers had set up his tent, Gaius staggered inside. He gave some thought to supervising the camp, but his raw throat, burning eyes, and pounding head precluded anything aside from sleep. He lay down hoping that he would feel better in the morning.

If anything, he felt worse. Still, he had to keep his men moving, so after eating and breaking camp, the column struck out to the southwest. To Gaius, the entire day seemed hazy, as he slept astride his horse and even his waking moments seemed dream-like. They had traveled for two hours when they met up with a Novar patrol of thirty riders. Seeing the condition of Gaius’s men, their commander, Marcellus, quickly formed up to escort them home. He tried asking questions to discover what had happened, but the tribune couldn’t seem to string words together well enough to make coherent sentences, and Paulus wouldn’t say more than five words without deferring to him. Marcellus didn’t manage to get much more than the barest of sketches about the events which had befallen them.

The one thing Gaius did remember about the trip was the rain. Even clear of the forest, the rain didn’t stop. The afternoon rain had ended by the time they departed the forest and entered the foothills the day before, but it caught them in the midst of their march to the pass. Odd, how he didn’t recall it raining as they traveled eastward to the forest, but then, he might not have noticed this one except that the downpour nearly knocked him off his horse. It drenched him and his men within moments, an icy rain with a touch of the mountain chill in it. Finding little dirt to turn to mud, it quickly found runnels through the rocks. Gushing streams formed before their eyes. Men fell in the running water, and horses slipped as well. They had to climb one of the rocky hills and wait out the storm. The streams vanished moments after the rain stopped, leaving tiny rivulets which gathered into small pools. The men moved on, miserable and wet. The tribune’s clothes did not fully dry out before they reached the Novar fortifications long after noon the next day.

Gaius thought he must be at the worst phase of his illness as Marcellus led him and Paulus to see Publius. He didn’t feel any worse than he had the day before, nor had his condition improved. He somehow managed to keep on his feet as he entered the proconsul’s office, where not only Publius, but also Marcus and a Dominus waited. Marcellus began his report to the three of them, while Gaius found a seat and poured himself some watered wine. He sipped at it, and when he decided that his stomach wouldn’t rebel, he took a long drink. The wine burned his parched throat, but he thought it dulled the ache in his head a little.

“What happened, Gaius?” Marcus asked as soon as Marcellus had gone. “From what he tells us, you’ve lost half your men, and Victrinus and the Dominus as well. Something hit you, and hit you hard. Was it the Kawyr?”

“No, not Kawyr. Orcs.”

Marcus frowned at him, while Publius stifled what might have been a giggle. “You can barely speak, Gaius, but do try harder,” the proconsul said. “It sounded as if you said orcs.”

“I did,” Gaius replied, barely hearing his own words. Shaking his head in frustration, he gestured to Paulus.

“The tribune did say Orcs, proconsul,” the young centurion said. He stood ramrod straight, eyes carefully following the Publius’s every move. The heavy man stood in front of his desk, leaning against it. Marcus stood at attention to one side. “Lots of them.”

“Are you certain?” Publius asked. When both Paulus and Gaius nodded, he said, “I don’t understand: I thought they were gone. Where’d they come from?” When the tribune and his centurion just looked at him blankly, he moved on to other questions, “Are they allied with the Kawyr? Are they both coming at us?”

“No Kawyr since we met the Orcs,” Gaius whispered. He gestured to Paulus to finish for him.

“We only had one Kawyr raid. Since then it’s been all Orcs, thousands of them.”

“We’ve only seen Kawyr,” Publius said.

“You’ve ha...” Gaius had to fight off a sudden fit of coughing. “A raid?”

“Yes, you could call it that. They killed all my pigeons.”

“Pigeons?” Gaius asked.

“It was ghastly,” Marcus said. “They killed the guards and the pigeonkeeper, then meticulously cut the throat of every bird there. We never saw them, never found any tracks. They could have just slipped away if they hadn’t attacked the Domini as well. The Kawyr didn’t fare so well against them.”

“They fared better than you think,” said the Dominus. He pulled a medallion from the neck of his robe, half of a glass ball inset in a steel circle. The glass had several cracks stemming from a single impact point.

“What is...?” asked Gaius.

“With this, I can talk to the person with the other half of the globe even if they’re on the other side of the world. The connection was delicate, though. The arrow which hit this severed the connection and nearly killed me as well.”

“I still think the Kawyr was aiming at you, not the medallion,” said Marcus. “How could he hit that if it was hidden beneath your robes?”

“You still don’t understand. Kawyr are conscious of things in a way which humans are not. He was aiming for this, otherwise you’d have one or two less Domini.”

“The point is that they’ve cut our communications,” Publius said. “You’re probably wondering how they got here without us seeing them?” That’s exactly what Gaius would have wondered if the pounding in his head would let him think straight. “There are apparently other ways through the mountains, passes and caves which we hadn’t located before.” Publius shook his head. “We’ve held this pass for two hundred years without realizing how easily they could circumvent it.” He gave one of his little laughs. “Well, no matter. The Domini have been helping us locate and seal any way around us. What I really want to know is whether the Kawyr and the orcs are working together. Was their raid supposed to help the Orcs? Did you see anything which points one way or the other?”

“The cache.” Gaius waved a finger at Paulus.

“Oh, yes. There was a store of weapons and food in the Kawyr village, apparently for the Orcs.”

“So they are working together. Do you have any idea how large this Orcish army is?”

“At least two thousand chased us,” Gaius said.

“There were lots of them just looking for us, to keep us from bringing you warning,” Paulus said. “I saw the cache, too. I don’t know exactly how many it was for, but Victrinus thought it was big enough for four legions. He thought there might be other caches, too.”

“Four legions,” Marcus whispered. “Maybe more. That’s twice what we have.” Publius was grimacing. The Dominus didn’t react at all.

“We have a strong position. With the help of the Domini, I don’t think we’re in for too great of a storm,” Publius said.

“Warlocks. There are...” Gaius started hacking again. He drew a breath, “There are also the warlocks.”

“How many?” asked the Dominus, suddenly interested.

Gaius gestured to Paulus, who answered while keeping his eyes on Publius, “We saw ten, with the two or three thousand we fought.”

Publius muttered, “If you only saw a sixth of their force, and the warlocks are evenly spread, there are at least fifty more.”

This time the Dominus did react, the shiver running through his body was visible even underneath the robes. “I believe that we will need reinforcements.”



Marcus and Publius helped Gaius to a comfortable bed inside the proconsul’s apartments. One of the Philosopher physicians arrived soon after. He spent a few minutes looking at his eyes, feeling his face and neck, and listening to his heart before feeding the tribune a drug that made him feel lightheaded. He began to drift even while his brother and cousin consulted with the Philosopher.

“Will he be all right?”

“Give him a week’s rest, and he will recover fully. I am not sure what he contracted over there, but I think he has already persevered through direst part of it.”

“I’m not sure he’ll get a chance to rest. How soon will he be able to travel?” Gaius distantly recognized Marcus’s voice. What travel?

“I would prefer it if he rested for a week, but if absolutely necessary, he may be capable of riding in two days.”

“That’ll have to do.”

Some time later Gaius became aware of his cousin and brother talking again.

“Are you sure about this?”

“We shouldn’t both be here when the Orcs come. I don’t intend to deprive the Empire of two princes in one blow.”

“We might survive, you know. Two-to-one odds won’t get them past the wall.”

“You saw how the Dominus reacted. He didn’t like the odds of eleven Domini against fifty warlocks. From Paulus’s description of that battle where the Dominus fought three warlocks, I don’t think the walls are enough. Unless we get reinforcements, Domini reinforcements, we won’t survive this.”

“So you want to send Gaius?”

“Gaius, and anyone the Domini want to send. Gaius can speak to the Emperor directly, make sure he hears. If the Empire sends a few legions...”

“You don’t think we can hold this pass until help arrives, do you?”

“No, I suppose I don’t. When the legions come, they won’t be holding the Orcs back. They’ll be driving them out, if they can.”

The voices faded to a buzz, leaving Gaius with the fleeting question of whether he’d remember this conversation when he awoke again.



Sunlight was streaming through the window of the small cell Gaius occupied the next time he came fully awake. He had only a vague recollection of coming to this room, and vaguer memories since then. He didn’t know whether they were of dreams, or moments of wakefulness. Where were Marcus and Publius? He started to sit up only to feel a firm hand on his shoulder. His blurry eyes made out dark robes on the odd man sitting on the wooden stool outside of the sunlight. A Dominus? “Who are you?” he asked.

“I am your physician; my name is Quinn. Your cousin Publius asked me to make sure you recover, which I have been doing,” he replied.

Now that he had spoken, Gaius could see that he wore a brown, unhooded robe, not the black, all-encompassing shroud of the Domini. He looked trim and fit, with a friendly face and an odd mustache. Novari did not care for mustaches, but the tribune had met a few Manuelites who favored them. Grey peppered both his dark hair and his mustache. Gaius could see the three black stripes at the cuffs of his sleeves, marking a fully trained Philosopher of the Body. Two more stripes, one blue and one green, marked specializations that Gaius could not identify. They ensured the man was competent, at least. A small table beside the bed held a few vials, a mortar and pestle, and a cup filled with water.

“How long have I been... unconscious?” he asked, pleased when he realized that his voice had returned.

“I have kept you more or less asleep for a full day and two nights,” he said as if he had every right to keep Gaius senseless. Maybe he did. “Publius asked me to make you well as quickly as possible, and that meant some drugs that do not encourage alertness. The light sleep you have been in for most of the past couple of days has sped your recuperation along nicely.”

“So why wake me up now?” he asked, looking around his room as well as he could while lying down. He thought it must have belonged to Publius’s personal slave. “Am I better?”

“Somewhat. You had already experienced the worst vicissitudes of the disease when you arrived here. I am sure you will be your usual vivacious self soon. For now, though, you are still feverish and I suspect your head pounds and your stomach hurts.”

Now that the Philosopher physician brought it up, Gaius realized all those things were true. “I don’t remember my stomach hurting before,” he complained.

“That part is a side effect of the medicine I’ve given you.” At Gaius’s glare, he shrugged, “It will keep the dizziness at bay and make the headaches tolerable. That should be worth a little distress in your stomach. In any case, you wanted to know why I ended your semiconscious state. It seems that, against my professional judgement, you are hale enough to travel, and the proconsul wants you to carry messages. I have already sent word to him that you are awake.”

Gaius resigned himself to patience and tried to make chitchat. While polite enough, the physician seemed more interested in probing his face and chest and asking him rude questions, all the things that marked a man either a pervert or a physician, if not both. His professional manner reassured Gaius somewhat. What was keeping Publius?

Marcus and Publius arrived together. “How are you doing, my boy?” his cousin asked. “Feeling any better?”

“Some. What’s going on? Quinn said something about travel.”

“Yes. Quinn’s a marvelous physician, isn’t he?”

“I don’t remember much of his treatment,” Gaius said sourly.

“No, I suppose you wouldn’t. Quinn, if you’ll give us some privacy.”

The physician cleared the table of everything aside from the cup and placed them in a small leather satchel. Aside from the medicine, the bag contained bandages and some odd-looking instruments that Gaius was thankful he couldn’t identify. Publius sat on the small stool the Philosopher had vacated. Marcus remained standing.

Publius spoke, his tone cheery considering the subject matter, “From what you’ve said, we’re in a pretty bad situation here. We’re lucky you made it back to give warning. Your testimony can convince the Empire to send reinforcements.”

“Will another legion or two help against warlocks?” Gaius asked.

“Well, the Domini want to bring help, too. Their leader here says that they’ll fight on our side.”

If Domini reinforcements came quickly, they might be able to hold off the Orcs after all. “So you want to send me as a messenger?”

“I’m giving you command of a small mounted force, some of the survivors of your expedition plus a few others.”

“Command? Me?” His bitter laugh broke into hacking. He held up his hand to keep them from speaking before the fit passed. “After what I did to the last command you gave me?”

“Gaius--” Publius began.

“You brought them back, didn’t you?” Marcus broke in. “The Orcs tried to stop you, but they couldn’t. You managed to bring your soldiers home in good order despite all odds. That is nothing to be ashamed of, Brother.”

“Thank Victrinus, or the Dominus, not me, Marcus. Better men than me died in my first eastern patrol.”

“Do you know how many men I lost in my first trip out there, Gaius? Over two hundred, more than a third of my cohort. I didn’t face anything close to the opposition you were up against. Just standard Kawyr raids, and I couldn’t protect them. You did well, little Brother.”

Gaius knew his older brother meant well, but he couldn’t make himself feel good about his mission. It seemed an insult to those who had died out there. Now they were sending him out of harm’s way while others stayed to fight. “So what do you want me to do?”

“The Kawyr raid severed our communications with the rest of the Empire,” Publius said. “We need someone to take our messages to the nearest relay station.”

“You mean the South Kainin Fort?”

“No. You’ll be traveling to the port of New Jovium. From there, you’ll send messages by pigeon, and continue by ship on to Novaro itself.”

“If you’re already sending pigeons, why do you need me to travel to the capital?”

“I can request reinforcements from the provinces, but it takes the Emperor to command them.” Publius shrugged apologetically. “Someone needs to convince your uncle in a way that can’t be done by letters, someone who’s a believable eyewitness, who has access to the Emperor. That’s you, Gaius.”

“All right, I’ll go.”

“Good. You leave in two hours. I’ll have Paulus make sure everything is ready.” Publius stood to leave. “Good luck, and the gods be with you.”

Marcus remained, leaning against the doorpost with his arms crossed. The fingers of his right hand drummed against his upper arm.

“What is it, Marcus? I know you want to say something.”

“Publius didn’t tell you about the omen we saw today.”

“I thought you didn’t believe in omens,” Gaius said.

“Usually I don’t any more than you do, but this... You know the sacred hens the priests keep? They trot them out every couple of days, watch them peck around a bit, and then declare a favorable omen? Well, today, one of them started heading westward. Maybe it was just wandering off, but it was doing so in a hurry. A bird, the biggest falcon I’d ever seen, swooped down and plucked it away. The hen was still twisting and turning in its talons as it flew over the wall and eastward. Not even the priests could find anything favorable in that.”

“You think I’m the chicken that got stolen? You’re sitting here with a great wave of Orcs about to crash down on you, and you’re worried about me? Is that why you’re sending me away? To protect me?”

“If it were, would you refuse to go?” Marcus didn’t wait for his brother to respond. “The proconsul has given you an order, and if you have any respect for him you’ll obey it. Every word he said was true. In any case, I don’t know whether you’ll be any safer than us. Like you said, I don’t believe in omens, but that seemed a bit too close for coincidence. Be careful, Gaius. I don’t want you to get hurt.”

“Neither do I,” Gaius said as Marcus turned to leave. “Be careful yourself!” he called to his brother’s back. He leaned back on his bed, wondering what had Marcus so worried over a bunch of birds. He considered closing his eyes and resting some, but two hours didn’t give him much time. Groaning, he got out of bed, wavering a bit as he tried to remember how to walk.

Gaius still felt groggy an hour later, while he sat astride his horse at the head of a hundred mounted soldiers. Despite the bright sunlight, the mid-morning kept much of the chill of the previous night. He could see the breath of both men and horses as they milled about churning up the mud inside the fort. The feet of slaves and soldiers sank into the mud as they hurried to load the remaining supplies onto the packhorses. Only about thirty of the men who had returned with Gaius from his last expedition joined this force. Gaius suspected that some of them had never ridden a horse before. Paulus, in particular, fidgeted uncomfortably in his saddle, sawing at the reins and greatly aggravating his horse.

“Calm down, Paulus,” Gaius advised. “Your horse is well trained. She’ll do what you want as long as you don’t upset her.”

Paulus smiled nervously at the advice, but his attitude toward the docile bay mare did not change. Quinn did not seem much more at ease on his grey gelding. Gaius had thought that all Manuelites knew how to ride. By contrast, the Dominus who had joined them had a natural grace that not even his bulky robes seemed to hinder. Gaius knew himself to be a good rider, but he still did not feel entirely well, so he looked on the Dominus with envy.

After the priest had given a blessing which seemed more earnest than usual, the company exited through the gates, heading west with the sun at their backs. Gaius wondered how much further he would have to run before he could turn and fight.



The four day ride south bored Gaius. Even though he wanted a peaceful journey, the tedium of it wore at his patience. The plains were fully as dusty and hot as he remembered, and before long he found himself wishing for the shade and frequent rain of the Kawyr forests. No proper road connected the pass and New Jovium, just a vaguely defined dirt track marked out by previous military columns and a few other travelers. They passed a few signs of human life, here and there a farm struggling to grow some sickly wheat, and once a village which seemed to have more dogs than people. Gaius’s command paused there for a bit of barter. The only useful commodity they found was some fresh water from the village’s wells. His traveling companions did little to make the journey more bearable. The Dominus was just as uncommunicative as his colleague had been. Gaius didn’t much want to talk to him in any case. Paulus had finally gotten over his awe of the prince to speak to him normally, but he still didn’t see it as his place to make small talk with his tribune. Every time Gaius attempted a conversation, he would turn it to the professional matters with which he felt comfortable. Quinn, at least, had no difficulty talking, though he left Gaius hard pressed to get a word in edge-wise. Even when he understood the physician’s stories, the tribune found them more gruesome than entertaining. The remaining travellers regarded the prince either with awe or, even worse, a hopeful confidence which he found unnerving. At the time of the mad flight from the Orcs, he had thought that the men must hold him responsible for their hardship. Only now did he realize that his small success of bringing half his patrol home alive had grown into a tale of defeating half the Orcish army. That might explain why the newcomers might regard him as a hero, but why did those who had actually run from the Orcs with him think he had accomplished some great deed? What did they think he would accomplish now, when he ran away from the true battle? Unable to face their expectations, Gaius rode as silently as the Dominus, staring at the rough road as if he could see something besides dirt. The hills of waving dead grass hid nothing but arid, empty land.

The destination held only a little more promise. New Jovium was a walled fishing village with a harbor deep enough for a deep sea vessel and a pier long enough to accommodate two of them. One ship moored to the dock now. Gaius sent Paulus immediately to secure it, not wanting the only ship in harbor to slip away before they got to it. The busier port of Martia had been full of ships when Gaius and Marcus had come through on the way to the South Kainin Fort. The old Jovium had once been a busy sea port, too, serving the needs of the army and the citizens of this province. It had burned to the ground in the last Kawyr war, and this village had grown up on its site. A few pieces of the old city remained. The villagers had scavenged most of its bricks to build their huts, but here and there a stone wall stood, made of blocks too big to be of much use in any structure smaller than a palace. One building remained fully intact, a long, narrow spike of a tower. Like much of the old city, it remained outside the wooden wall that surrounded the village. The wall curved awkwardly to keep its distance from the tower. The Dominus broke off from the main column without a word and headed toward this building. Apparently the Domini still had a presence here.

Few other people did. A handful of women carrying baskets filled with fish returned to their small homes with children in tow. They kept a wary eye on the soldiers. Gaius wondered that he saw mostly women and a few dirty children in the streets until he realized that the men would be out in their fishing boats this early in the afternoon. The smell of fish permeated the entire village, emanating from an open market close to the shore. An even stronger smell drifted from a large building nearby. Garum, a powerful fish sauce used in many Novar dishes, must be a main export of this town. As seldom as merchant vessels came here, Gaius doubted they could sell fresh fish. The village needed no proper streets, as the haphazard placement of the houses left plenty of open space to traverse the town, though it required nearly as much weaving around obstacles as the Kawyr forest had. It took the tribune and his followers some time to find the pigeon house, though he could follow the sound of cooing pigeons. An old man with poor hearing owned the deteriorating brick building. It took Gaius a long while to convinced the caretaker that he was a legitimate representative of the government and had the legal authority to appropriate pigeons. After seeing the few bedraggled birds, Gaius made copies of his messages and used half the birds in the cage marked Novaro. He sent other birds to the capitals of nearby provinces, including Transolympia and Anorum, but he could find no birds for Cisolympia. The closest of the provinces, Cisolympia would have had some small chance of sending troops in time. Gaius didn’t want to think on what chance Publius and his brother had without them. He did encounter some good luck when he found pigeons for the northern garrisons of this province. He did not know how much help they could send without stripping the northern reaches of the Kainin bare, but he sent word to them as well. After providing the old pigeonkeeper with papers which should, barring any unforeseen problems with the labyrinthine Novar bureaucracy, gain him recompense for the commandeered birds, Gaius also left him with a few coins for his trouble, knowing that the old man would not see any further payment for a while.

When Gaius stepped out of the foul-smelling place, he was confronted by an odd man. Although his toga had a thin purple stripe signifying some rank, its brilliant white had gone dingy from years without a good fuller. The toga fit the man, who also looked worn, with gray hair and a creased face, though he could not have been far past middle-age. He looked as much like a peasant as the villagers who had congregated behind him, more watching the interchange than in a show of support. He stood without stoop, however, and his sharp eyes took in Gaius in one pass. “Welcome to New Jovium, young tribune,” he said in a rough voice that yet held some dignity. “My name is Marcus Castor Tullius, the praetor of this town. I was wondering what brought you and your men here.”

Gaius berated himself for his impropriety. He should have presented himself to the praetor as soon as he arrived. Instead the praetor, the elected official who served as the sole government of this village, had come to him. That either showed a obeisance that did not fit the dignity this Tullius showed, or a willingness to set aside honor for the sake of his town. Gaius shot his centurion a glance, but Paulus simply shrugged. He was still getting used to the idea of leading his peers and elders, he couldn't be expected to know what courtesies were due the local ruler. The tribune couldn’t think of a way to save his own face, so he simply answered, “Greetings, Tullius. I am Gaius Julius Principius, a tribune under Publius Aurelius's command. I must apologize for not coming to see you right away--I was in such a hurry to send my messages that I forgot.”

If Tullius recognized Gaius as an Imperial prince, he gave no indication. “They must be important messages, then,” Tullius said mildly.

“They are. An army is attacking from the East, an army of Orcs,” Gaius said. “I've been sent to inform the Emperor.”

“Orcs? Are you serious?” His eyes locked with Gaius's for a moment. “I believe you are. Should we evacuate?”

“I-I'm not sure,” Gaius said. Publius hadn't given him any orders concerning New Jovium: he couldn't just tell the entire town to pack up and leave.

“Will the Legions be able to stop them, do you think?” Tullius prodded.

“They'll try,” Gaius said. “If the reinforcements arrive quickly enough, they should be able to. If they can't, I'm sure the proconsul will send word.”

“In that case, we will prepare to leave, but wait for word from the Legions, one way or the other, before doing so,” Tullius said.

“That sounds like a wise plan, Praetor Tullius,” Gaius said, glad the praetor had come up with it without his help.

“In that case, I will leave you to your journey. I wish you well in bringing reinforcements.”

The Dominus found him moments later. “Any luck?” the man asked.

“Well, I’ve sent what pigeons I could. How about you?”

“I sent word to the Domini. Unfortunately, the tower here is missing the most important part of any such tower, so I will be traveling with you to Martia.”

“I’m supposed to go directly to Novaro,” Gaius said. “I did not intend to stop in Martia.”

The Dominus met his glare with the blankness of his unseen face. “Reaching Martia would quicken my journey by several days. It would not slow you down much, and this way I can bring help to the pass quicker than you can even if you sprout wings and fly.”

The tribune gritted his teeth. Did every Dominus see it as his duty to get under Gaius’s skin? At least going through Martia would give him a chance to pass on Publius’s request for help to Cisolympia. “All right, we’ll see whether the ship in the harbor can take us to either Martia or Novaro.”

Paulus stood on the ship’s deck with Captain Tracillo when they arrived. The trade ship Mercury had only a single bank of oars and a large sail. The shipwright had built for capacity, not speed, whatever the name. Its large cargo hold could carry most of Gaius’s men, though horses would have to be corralled on the deck. Since Tracillo sailed under military contract, he sought to accommodate as many of the steeds as possible, but Gaius decided to split his men in half. He took Paulus, Quinn, and the Dominus, along with ten others of the men who had fought the Orcs with him, two of them centurions. He ordered Manulus, who led the turma which had escorted them, to take the rest of the soldiers westward as fast as they could travel. Putting all of them in one boat risked too much on an unreliable sea. Gaius didn’t bother trying to load all of the horses on the ship, whatever the captain’s willingness, bringing only Zephyrus and the Dominus’s mount, since the man would hear no word of leaving his black stallion behind. The ship was underway before sunset.


This chapter is a 5,727 word excerpt from a 90,110 word novel.

Saturday, November 19, 2005

Ghosts, Chapter 11 of Fire
The Rest of the Story: The whole of Fire can be found on my Writings page in PDF format, while the portion of the story that's been published on this blog so far is on this page.

For this chapter I return to Randall's point of view. I had decided to tell of the confronation which began in the last chapter somewhat differently, starting at the end. I'd already laid out the fundamental idea that I was using back in Chapter 4, but this gave me a chance to draw on it. I hoped for a somewhat creepy effect, and I think I've achieved that.


Chapter 11
Ghosts


If he hadn’t known that he was already too late, Randall would have run. Even knowing, he still hurried through the busy streets of Novaro with as much haste as a Dominus could show in public. For once, he appreciated the way people shied away from him, making it possible to speed through the city that kept most pedestrians to a crawl. Laws kept carts off the roads during the day, but nothing kept horsemen and beasts of burden out. Thus Randall found his way blocked most often by mules and horses who did not know that they should flee before a Dominus in a hurry. He dodged around them as well as he could, staying on the raised stepping stones which elevated pedestrians above the filth and manure which accumulated in the streets. Not all the manure was animal, either, as some people emptied their chamberpots without concern for their fellow citizens. Since upper stories tended to overhang the streets, there was always the risk of being hit, and nothing could ruin the dignity of a Dominus quicker than being drenched in human waste. For once, Randall didn’t keep an eye above as he maneuvered through the streets. Even the smell of sweat and refuse, which made any visit to Novaro unpleasant, faded from the mind as the odor of smoke became more and more pronounced.

He had hoped he would be quick enough to prevent this insane move by Kulsin, but he had discovered his failure the moment he left the Novaro tower. In a city of close-packed buildings, the rumor of fire spread faster than the fire itself. Even though no one would speak to a Dominus directly, he had heard of it long before he could see the smoke. Snatches of a dozen conversations placed the flames variously in the fullers’ district, in the Circus Aurelius, or in the Imperial palace itself. However, most of the rumors pointed toward the home of Marcus Julius Principius, the unnamed heir to the Emperor. Randall cursed Kulsin a hundred times over under his breath as he jogged toward the home he had never visited. The majority of the citizens had already fled by the time he came within a mile. No one in Novaro took fires lightly. A few nearby buildings had begun to burn, and the Fire Watch hastened to pull down structures lest they provide fuel for the burgeoning conflagration. They had used water from the fountains in the area to fight the flames, but the flow proved insufficient for the task. The fire had gutted the still blazing Principius home, and the Watch had abandoned their efforts to save the townhouse in order to focus on containing the fire. Randall wondered how many of the nearby rundown tenements they could have saved had they not spent so much effort trying to rescue the wealthy Senator’s home.

Despite the danger from smoke and heat, a sizable crowd had gathered near the Senator’s home. The Watch’s dark cloaks marked them a source of authority in the chaos as they worked feverishly to slow the fire, though a few mingled with the other group of people. The residents of the townhouse, Randall supposed. Some appeared to be slaves, but one woman, dressed too well to be a slave though not well enough to be the mistress, wailed aloud while a tall, red-haired girl in an undersized tunic tried to comfort her. For a moment, he thought he saw something odd about the girl, who had the look of a slave, but he was too busy trying to avoid notice to worry about her. Even in chaos such as this, maybe especially in this sort of chaos, a Dominus drew all eyes. The smoke helped obscure what people saw, however, and he wasted no time as he stepped into a side alley filled with smoke from the burning buildings. There he found a gaping hole which let him into the Principius villa.

He had wrapped himself in a protective Circuit that kept the flames at a foot’s distance as he stepped through the ruins. The shield’s ability to stop solid objects as well as fire kept a collapsing doorway from crushing his skull. Unfortunately, purifying the air proved more challenging, and even though he didn’t choke on the smoke, he found his eyes watering and his nose filled with the scent of burning wood. Simply walking through the house put out flames as they fell within the range of his dampening Circuit, but he followed that up with some more directed magic, snuffing out flame and fanning away smoke as he sought the cause of the fire.

It didn’t take long. In a small chamber which he supposed must have been a bedroom before the walls had burned away and the upper story spilled its contents inside, he found two badly-burned bodies lying among the broken crockery and shattered furniture. He could still recognize the black robe of a Dominus despite the fire’s markings. The charring surprised him more than the robe’s survival, as the cloth did not burn easily. Nothing but bones remained of the Dominus’s body, though he could easily tell that the other body had been a young girl. Hair and clothes had completely burned away, and the flames had consumed the flesh down to the bone in some places. Randall gagged as he dashed more wetness from his eyes. He had never met Lucia, and few identifying features remained in any case, but he didn’t know who else it could be. He fought to breathe past the tightness in his chest, spots flashing in front of his eyes. Only his fear of fainting in this burning house kept him on his feet. How could this have happened? Kulsin had wanted to bring Lucia to the City, probably hoping to frighten her into testifying against her uncle. After that, he’d have set her free as long as he didn’t really believe Aulus Principius had been training her. If he did believe that, Randall had no idea what he might have done, but surely not this. Even if Kulsin had decided to kill the girl, he wouldn’t have done it before she could testify. And all that aside, what had killed the Dominus?

Randall knew of one way to find out. Death memories tended to linger even when they did not create ghosts, and magic left its own trace. A death involving magic only a few hours old should still have a readable imprint, although the fire might have damaged it. Randall first brought the flames under control and cleared out the smoke, not a difficult task since the fire had pretty much burned itself out already. He then prepared his Circuit, carefully connecting filaments to the floor, the walls, the blackened brazier, anything that could hold a memory. The bodies themselves Randall ignored, as dead flesh never held anything a Dominus could read. He completed his Circuit with the Components necessary to turn magic into living memories. Carefully, in a small, steady trickle, Randall sent Essence, the very substance of magic, into the Circuit to bring the energized imprints to visible life.

A translucent image of a young girl appeared. She stood near where the bed had sat, only a few feet from the girl’s body on the floor. Her raven hair swung as she slowly shook her head, grey eyes wide as she screamed out words soundlessly at someone unseen. Randall wished he could hear what she was saying, but sound simply did not imprint well. She vanished suddenly, but a black-robed figure appeared almost immediately afterward, a Dominus standing near the door, forming a simple yet effective Circuit that should incapacitate its target.

Randall watched as Essence ran through convoluted channels. The reappearance of its target startled him, while the whirling vortex of Essence that surrounded her in response to the Circuit stunned him. Randall had never seen anything like it. The Domini disciplined themselves to use magic in strictly structured forms for specific, controlled purposes. A Dominus could only make very simple Circuits on the fly. Teams of Domini could join their abilities to make more complicated Circuits, but only at great effort over long time periods, carefully designing Circuits which they inlaid in physical objects that could hold them indefinitely. This swirling mass of magic differed from the structured magic of the Domini as much as a whirlpool differed from an aqueduct. The magical vortex twisted and tore at the Dominus’s Circuit, nearly wresting it from him as he struggled to maintain its function and focus. The girl tossed her head to and fro as she felt its diluted effects.

Suddenly another figure appeared, a red-haired girl at least a head taller than the other girl, and probably a few years older. A carving knife in hand, she rushed at the Dominus, coming from behind him where the doorway to the room had once stood. Her knife bounced off the shield protecting the Dominus, and his translucent image flickered as he shifted his attention from one girl to the other, the raven haired girl vanishing altogether from the tableau. The redhead tried to circle around the Dominus to get between him and younger woman, but he formed a simple and direct Circuit, a raw flow of magic which leapt from him to the girl, dropping her almost exactly where the body lay. She faded from sight as she died. The other girl popped back into existence, magic whirling around her once more as rage and fear twisted her face. A tendril of the whirlwind snapped out and latched onto the brazier still in the corner of the room. A gout of phantom fire leapt from it onto the Dominus. He tried to douse the small fire at the hem of his robes with magic, but more tendrils of the vortex encircled him, forming a less intense version of the whirlwind surrounding the girl. What had been a tiny, smoldering spark became an inferno in an instant, and he vanished within it, bursts of flame escaping to light the bed and other bits of cloth and wood. The magic remained a moment longer, encircling an upright corpse Randall could no longer see. The source of this storm remained quite still, watching with hollow eyes from inside her own whirlwind of Essence. Then magic and ghost faded together.

Randall watched phantom flames lick vanished walls, noting that the flames had left a stronger imprint than normal fire would have. Its rapid spread did not concern him as much as the red-haired girl. How could he have seen her die when he had also seen her alive outside? He had recognized her immediately. Why did the flame-licked body look as if it did not quite fit the slave girl? What had become of the other girl, the one around whom the magic swirled?

Before Randall could reverse the magic and watch the scene again from the beginning, she reappeared, kneeling next to where the body lay, tears streaming down her face and lips quavering as she mouthed indiscernible words. She reached out and rolled some invisible object over, into the space occupied by the body. Suddenly, magic whirled around both her and the body, and they changed. The girl’s hair lengthened as its shade brightened to a fiery red, she grew taller and older before his eyes. The image of the dead girl reappeared as the magic embraced her, overlaid with the burned corpse still there. He watched as it shrank in age and height, its hair darkening to a raven black, its proportions exactly matching what remained of the body that lay there now. The ghost image of the corpse departed with the magic, but the live girl, now the twin of the one who had died, remained. Her now mature body did not fit well into the old tunic, which had not changed with her. She stared at herself, eyes wider than ever and face going very pale beneath the new freckles. Her eyes wandered the room wildly, until she finally noticed the fire. Lurching to her feet, she ran awkwardly from the room, nearly tripping over her own feet.

Randall watched her leave the reach of his Circuit. He had more questions than answers now. Who had died here? He thought that Lucia was young, probably twelve or thirteen, and dark hair made more sense for a Novar as well. The tall, red-haired girl looked like a Northerner, probably a slave. So had Lucia, the black-haired girl, survived, becoming the red-haired girl in the process? Or had the red-haired girl been masquerading as Lucia the whole time? Whoever she was, she had shapechanged. From everything he knew, only the misnamed demons had that ability. Even without the shapechanging, the Essence had behaved so differently for her than for the Domini. Was that what happened when a woman learned the magic? Randall doubted it, but the alternative scared him more. What if she really were a Malwer? Was her brother a shapechanger as well? If Randall couldn’t tell her identity for certain, he couldn’t know whether they shared the same blood at all. He had to find the red-haired girl before she changed into someone, or something, else.

First, though, he had to deal with this mess. A sharp surge in the flow of Essence brought the ghostly flames much closer to life. Randall could smell the smoke and feel the rush of heat, he could see the fire which filled the room gain the same substance as real flame. As suddenly as it had come, it vanished, the increased flow of magic washing away the imprint, rendering it blank to any other Domini who came by. Whatever else happened, he didn’t want Kulsin and his lackeys hunting Lucia down and destroying her, which they most certainly would do if they discovered the truth. It would be better for them to think her dead. He knew that such obstruction bordered on Forbidden; that its discovery could make him a Renegade. He also knew that Kulsin and his ilk would label her a murderer, an enemy of the Domini, unable to see a frightened young girl who had reacted in terror and anger, which is what he dearly hoped he had seen. Randall didn’t want Lucia harmed unless it became absolutely necessary. If it did, he’d do it himself. If he could.




Randall weaved through the convoluted streets of another city. It did not even occur to him to marvel that he had come hundreds of miles in less than an hour. Instead, the upcoming interview occupied his mind, except for that part which he dedicated to navigating the haphazard city. While the Domini had laid out the main thoroughfares in an orderly and sensible manner, the narrow streets and alleys which had sprung up around them obscured that order. The Inner City made Novaro look well-planned. Small streets crossed the thoroughfares from every direction, sometimes five or six coming together at a single point. These streets varied in size from just wide enough for a man to large enough for an army to march ten abreast. Their construction differed as well. While large granite blocks paved the main arteries, the smaller roads could be made of bricks or stones or gravel. It all came from letting the Domini build their own city, placing homes and their corresponding streets as needed rather than letting Philosopher planners lay the whole thing out from the start. The homes were as diverse as the roads, ranging from palatial to quaint, and a few that were both. Size and design did not always match, and a few Domini had tried to create grand structures without sufficient room, while others seemed content with sprawling simplicity. Architectures crossed the world, from Novar to Kairnin to Manuelite. Quite a few bore no resemblance to any culture’s architecture, while others borrowed elements from all of them.

The home of Lucia’s uncle had the simple lines of a Novar townhouse, tamed to a smaller size than the homes in which he must have grown up. Still, it held Aulus Principius and his jailers comfortably. Four or five of them stood at positions both inside and outside the home around the clock to make sure that the prisoner couldn’t go anywhere. Randall doubted that the guards held him in place as tightly as the oath he had given to the Senate. Aulus Principius kept his word.

Randall walked up to the door, receiving barely a glance from the Dominus on guard there. Kulsin had given no orders to prevent Aulus from receiving guests, and Randall had visited him often before the arrest, although he had not come since. He had meant to come, but his shame at the role he had played in the Senator’s house-arrest had encouraged him to put it off. The longer he went without talking to Aulus, the harder it became to face him and explain both his actions in the Senate and his lengthening absence. Only now, with the shock of what he’d just seen still muddling his thoughts, did urgent need force him to seek out Aulus Principius no matter how awful it felt.

Randall found the Senator in his reading room, reclining on a couch while he examined a yellowed scroll. Another Dominus sat on a stool nearby. Cubbyholes filled to overflowing with scrolls, tablets, and books seemed to interest Aulus’s keeper less than the blue and green rug on the floor. At the new arrival’s look, the guard left to give them some privacy. Randall had no illusions about the guard’s discretion or loyalty, so he formed a Circuit to keep their voices confined to the room.

Aulus put down his scroll, sat up, looked at his visitor carefully, then said without preamble, “Kulsin tells me you betrayed me.” His tone was too neutral for the words.

Randall’s paused halfway onto the vacated stool, his planned speech slipping from his mind. “That’s not... exactly true.”

“Not exactly true? Well, I’m relieved.” Randall had forgotten how sarcastic Aulus could be. He forced himself to sit down.

“I’m trying to do what’s right, Aulus.”

“And that includes betraying my trust?”

“I don’t know what it includes! I just know that neither you nor Kulsin are right.”

“And you are?”

“Maybe I am, maybe not...” Randall shook his head, deciding to deal with the issue by avoiding it. “That’s not why I came here. Kulsin sent Tian to try to take your niece.”

“I’ve been expecting this. If he harmed her... wait a moment. What do you mean by ‘try’?”

“Tian is dead.”

“Dead? Did she kill him?”

“You don’t seem particularly surprised.”

“I know something of what she’s capable of, but obviously not enough. Tell me what happened.”

“Not much remained by the time I arrived. There were two bodies. One belonged to Tian, the other looked like Lucia’s.”

“He killed her!” Aulus bolted to his feet, causing Randall to nearly overbalance on his stool. The older man’s hands clenched and unclenched, his face flushed with anger.

The younger Dominus hastened ahead. “No, no! Tian killed Lucia’s slave girl. The tall red-haired one.”

The fury drained out of Aulus, the harsh lines of his face softening. “Jaelin. Her name was Jaelin. What happened to Lucia?”

“I raised the ghosts to see what had happened. Tian tried to stun Lucia, but she resisted somehow. Essence whirled around her, and Tian’s Circuit couldn’t hold together. The slave girl--Jaelin, you said--attacked the Dominus. He killed her, and Lucia killed him. Aulus, I’ve never seen anything like it. I didn’t think Essence could behave that way--she just reached out to a brazier and threw the flames at Tian. Did you know about this?”

“I’ve seen her do things before, but nothing like that. I can believe it though. What happened to Lucia?”

“When Tian was dead, she went to Jaelin, and they both changed. She became the slave girl, and Jaelin’s body became hers.”

“Are you saying she changed shape?” Aulus looked at Randall hard. “Are you sure you didn’t misread the ghosts?”

“I’m perfectly sure. I had seen the red-haired girl outside, before I went into the house. She was gone when I came back out, though. You didn’t know about the shapechanging, did you?”

“No I didn’t. Did anyone else see this?”

“No, and I wiped it before I left. Kulsin claims you’ve taught her in defiance of our laws. This would convince him beyond all doubt.”

“Taught her? I’ve spent months trying to figure out how she’s doing these things. How could I have taught them to her?”

“I’m not saying that you have, I’m telling you that Kulsin believes you have. What have you learned about her? Do you know what she is?”

“She’s a frightened young girl, one we have to find.”

“How? If she can change shape, she could be anyone by now.”

“I don’t think so. She barely understands what she’s doing. I watched her for months, remember, and it’s obvious she has no real control over it. She may not even be able to change back.”

“That doesn’t make any sense. To do that sort of thing would require precise control. I can’t imagine the complexity of the Circuit. You can’t do anything at all by accident.”

“Randall, you’re assuming that her magic works like ours. I can’t tell you how it works, but I know she doesn’t see Essence and manipulate it directly. I don’t think she sees it at all.”

“But how--”

Aulus began to pace, his quick strides taking him the length of the small room almost as soon as he turned. “We know that Essence reacts to the mind, that it’s influenced in some way by a person’s consciousness. If we thoroughly understood that interaction, it’s feasible we could read a person’s mind by observing the ebb and flow of Essence. What if it works the other way as well and Essence can affect a person’s mind? What if that person were sensitive enough to its subtlety that she began to understand what its influence meant, that this sensation meant that someone nearby were angry, say? Like the way we hear sounds, identify them as words, and understand the concepts, all the while not even recognizing them as vibrations in the air--to us, they’re just words.”

“So you’re saying that Lucia’s so sensitive to Essence that she knows what it means without even being aware of it? I don’t see how this explains her ability to do things with it.”

“Well, she’s more sensitive to it, but it’s also more sensitive to her. Essence responds to everyone. We can speculate about mind-reading because it is affected by a person’s thoughts. You and I were born with the ability to approach it in a different way than normal people. What if, in Lucia’s case, Essence responds to her just like it responds to everyone else, but more strongly? She doesn’t manipulate it by teaching her mind to focus on it in a new way--it’s as natural as speaking is for us. If she can understand the vibrations in the air, how much of a leap is it for her to make her own vibrations. It may be harder, but she’s already past the hardest part, understanding what they mean.”

“Do you really think that’s how it works for her? It’s... incredible. I can’t imagine how it could be true.”

Aulus stopped his pacing to look Randall in the eyes. “It’s as much speculation as anything else. I’ll tell you this, though, in all the time I watched her, she never seemed to notice Essence itself. She always seemed to focus on what, or who, she was manipulating.”

“If this is so, shouldn’t you be able to tell? If Essence is so sensitive to her, Lucia should be broadcasting her thoughts. Even if we can’t read what particular thoughts she’s thinking, but we should see the ripples.”

“You couldn’t tell from the ghosts, but sometimes you can see how Essence responds to just her thoughts, even when she’s not changing anything. Randall, imagine what she could teach us. We spend years experimenting in order to figure out the Circuits to do simple tasks. We could discover as much in a few moments just by watching how she does those things.”

“You might think it’s wonderful; others will find it terrifying. Kulsin, for example. If he knew about this, he’d want her dead.”

“We’ll have to keep him away from her, then.” Aulus fixed Randall with a look that demanded, although the words came out as a plea, “Will you help her? Whatever you think of me, you can’t let Kulsin kill her just because he doesn’t understand her power.”

“I’ll do what I can, but you have other problems right now, Aulus. Kulsin intends to Expel you.”

“That’s what he intended to do, but what evidence does he have now? You said he’ll think Lucia is dead, so he doesn’t have anything left to work with.”

“He’ll have your nephew testify.”

The older Senator smiled grimly. “If he does that, he’ll be the one defying our laws. He can’t have an Initiate testify.” Even Aulus agreed with that law. Redleaf made the students too susceptible to persuasion for them to make reliable witnesses. Besides, no student should know about the internal politics of the Domini that early.

“Kulsin plans to promote the boy to Acolyte.”

“Victor’s too young for that; he hasn’t even been here a year yet. Kulsin can’t possibly think he’s ready to advance.”

“There’s precedent. I skipped a year, so did you.”

“We had superior educations, making some of the mundane training unnecessary, but even then it took two years. If he’s like us, Victor still needs that long to develop a firm grasp on magic before he can be made an Acolyte.”

“His grasp on magic is better than you think. It almost seems like he has an intuition for it.”

Aulus waved that away. “This is too transparent, Randall. Promoting Victor to Acolyte before he’s ready might kill him. My allies will see through this charade of Kulsin’s and keep Victor where he is.”

“No they won’t, Aulus. If--and I do mean if--they have the boy’s best interests at heart, they know that whatever risk promoting him now incurs, it’s better than the alternative.”

“What alternative?”

“He’s learning too fast, Aulus! Don’t you realize what that means? No one learns this quickly. It takes us years to do even simple things, but he does it like he’s known how all his life. Some of the conservatives think that Kulsin’s playing politics when Victor should be dealt with more directly. It frightens them, and they’re not the only ones. Seeing him work is unnerving. All of his instructors are worried, even me.”

“What are you saying? You don’t believe the old myths, do you? That he’s some sort of doppleganger?”

“Kulsin thinks it’s simpler than that, fortunately. He thinks you taught him. If he thought it was the other... The old records warn that it’s possible--”

“That’s a myth, a legend with no substance. No one really believes in them anymore,” Aulus scoffed.

“That, Aulus, is what brought you to this point. You truly believe, deep down, that everyone thinks like you do. Anyone who disagrees is either stupid or lying.”

“And what do you think? Do you really believe he’s a doppleganger out of some fairy tale?”

“No, I don’t. But some Senators think it’s possible.”

“Ridiculous!”

“I’m not so sure.”

“Then you do believe in dopplegangers?”

“I don’t believe that your nephew is one. I also don’t believe that the existence of them is as ludicrous as you think. I saw what your niece did, remember? I want to believe you’re right about her abilities and she somehow does it all by accident. Note, it’s less farfetched to believe that some thing has taken her place. It’s not a leap of logic to think that something like it has taken Victor’s place as well. So don’t tell me it’s impossible.” Randall came to a halt, his argument spent. He waited for Aulus to respond, but that didn’t happen, so he filled the silence himself. “At the least, you can be certain that some of the Senators believe. If Kulsin wanted to pursue that particular course, it’d be messy. No one’s spoken the word yet, but you can hear the threat in Kulsin’s diatribes. Your supporters will go along with what he wants rather than risk him making the accusation. The thing is, the boy scares them as well. Some of them are more comfortable with the idea that you taught him.”

“And what do you think?”

“I don’t know. Did you teach Victor?”

“Will you believe me if I say no?”

“You’ve never lied to me, Aulus. You’ll dance around the truth if you want to hide something, but if you tell me straight out I’ll trust you.”

“Then, no, I did not teach my nephew. What will Kulsin do when he discovers that?”

“He probably won’t accept it. You know him--he never lets facts get in the way of his beliefs.”

Aulus’s laugh was short and bitter. “You’re right, of course. He also never lets his beliefs get in the way of politics. If Victor denies that I taught him, he has no grounds to attack me. What will Kulsin do then?”

The answer was so obvious it appalled Randall that he hadn’t thought of it earlier. “He’ll have to go after Victor. The possibility of doppleganger won’t go away now that the Senators are thinking of it. With no alternative explanation, the proceedings for Inquisition will take place, whether Kulsin really wants them to or not. Since Inquisitions always find what they’re looking for, Victor will die. Do you think Kulsin realizes that? He’s perfectly convinced that you taught him, so maybe he hasn’t considered the possibility that he can’t prove it. I don’t think he wants the boy dead.”

“Oh, Kulsin’s considered it, all right, and he knows that I’ll consider it as well. It’s very clever. The only way my nephew will survive is if Kulsin can prove that I taught him. I can only defend myself if I’m willing to sacrifice my nephew.”

“What are you going to do?”

“I need to get a message to Victor. Will you deliver it? You owe me this much.”

Randall sighed, knowing that he could not argue against that. “Okay, I’ll help you as long as it means helping Victor.”

“Good. Come back tomorrow, I should be ready then.”

Somewhat annoyed at the dismissal, Randall departed. The guard, who had been standing at the door, went in the moment he left.


This is a 5,166 word chapter of a 90,110 word novel.

I'm hardly the first person to suggest that ghosts are not so much souls as memories, impressions of someone's life remaining where they had passed. I'm not really sure I believe in ghosts at all, but the idea appealed to me, so I inserted it into my fantasy novel. I also liked the idea that memories of strong emotion and magic last longer, which is what caused the players in this scene to fade in and out, hopefully adding to its overall creepiness. If this book is ever published, and if I get any say in its cover art (which is seldom the case, I understand), this is the scene I want on its cover.

I've just recently finished reading two books, George R.R. Martin's A Feast for Crows, and Robert Jordan's Knife of Dreams. I've noticed that Martin is absolutely brutal to his characters, killing and crippling them without much concern, while Jordan preserves even the smallest character until he absolutely has to give them up. I don't think either path works that well. Killing off important and semi-important characters increases the sense of risk and makes the story more powerful, but go too far and it's hard to get attached to anyone. I always read books for the characters, and I'd like my readers to get attached to mine, enough so that they worry whenever their lives seem at risk. I killed off a few characters in Fire. Jaelin wasn't the first--that honor belongs to Victrinus, I believe--but I'll admit I've become kind of attached to her. She was a rather minor character in the book so far, but in later chapters certain things come out that make her far more interesting. I began to regret her death, which is how I knew it was the right thing to do. A death that means nothing is cheap, and I don't like cheap deaths in fiction.

Wednesday, November 9, 2005

Unwanted Grace
The following was my entry in Faith in Fiction's conversion story contest. With the instruction to write a conversion story, I had to wonder how to do that. I had been considering that question already, as I figured Ryan of Eyes in the Shadow would become a Christian sooner or later. At the time, I had figured that would happen later rather than sooner, but with the urgnecy of a contest coming up that I wanted to enter, I saw the opportunity to kill two birds with one stone. The main problem, of course, was that Ryan and Emily are established characters who have a history, in my mind at least, but I needed to present them in a 3,000 word short story which could be read independently. I'll discuss that a bit more afterwards.


Unwanted Grace
by Donald S. Crankshaw


With nothing to do except wait for the end of his world, the one thing Ryan didn’t have to worry about was a shortage of waiting rooms. The one for the Recovery Room was his third. He’d already been in the waiting rooms for the Emergency Room and the Operating Room, and he’d probably be in one for the ICU soon. This late at night, the drab space was brightly lit but nearly empty. Aside from the staff, doctors and nurses who would hurry through the room while avoiding eye contact lest they be asked questions they couldn’t answer, there was a Hispanic family across the room from him, lost in their own misery. The mother was crying, as she’d been doing since before Ryan had arrived, tears and sobs that were hoarse when not silent. Her husband, who had his arm around her, looked frightened and angry. At least the little girl was asleep. Ryan didn’t know whom they were here for; he didn’t have the courage to ask. Besides, he had his own problems, and their grief and worry was making him even tenser. And, he reluctantly admitted to himself, they made him envious. At least they weren’t alone. He’d give anything to be able to put his arm around someone, to take comfort even as he gave it, but the person he wanted was the one lying in the Recovery Room.

Ryan closed his eyes, shutting out the worried little family, the framed posters of soothing waterfalls and mountains, the out-of-date magazines stacked on the end tables. He leaned his head back until it bumped against the wall. Why hadn’t he seen headlights or heard squealing tires? What was the car even doing on Winter Street? The street was closed to all but emergency and delivery vehicles, leaving pedestrians free to wander the middle of the road as they browsed the shops in the area. At the late hour when Ryan and his fiancée were there, the road had been completely empty until the hit-and-run.

Ryan still had no idea how he was unharmed, while Emily… He remembered vicious and sudden pain exploding in his back as everything spun around him, uneven bricks tearing at his face, and agony lancing up his arm as it was crushed to jelly. Then Emily was beside him. She had been hurt too, and she grew worse even as she tried to help him, her breathing growing difficult and labored. Soon she was gasping for breath as she tried to murmur prayers and words of comfort at the same time, and Ryan wanted to soothe her but he could barely move his lips. He had been scared but calm until he saw her lips turning blue and heard a wet, sickening paflup in time with her ragged breathing. That was when he started to panic, but the rush of adrenaline failed to revive him, and instead the world grew foggy and dim. The last memory he had was of her cell phone, falling from her twitching fingers to crack as it hit the pavement.

The next thing he remembered was being checked over by the paramedics in the ambulance. He had been strapped down, telling them that no, it didn’t hurt when they pressed on his ribs. Wondering why that was so. The pain had vanished, as had any trace of his injury aside from his bloody shirt. The paramedics hadn’t found any problems with him. The doctors had likewise pronounced him fine, once they had given him a similar inspection at the hospital.

Ryan didn’t feel fine. He didn’t understand how he could vividly remember such intense pain and now be fine. Emily would have called it a miracle, but he wasn’t sure he believed in them. To call him a skeptic would have been an understatement. But if Emily was the one with the faith, why was she in there while he was out here trying not to go crazy?

His eyes snapped open and he sat up. With a glance at the miserable family on the other side of the room, he got to his feet and walked out the door before he could stop to think about it. He didn’t want to think, he wanted to do something.

For the moment, he settled for roving the hospital’s halls, dodging nurses and doctors on their way to save lives and comfort the sick. He had had a lot of respect for them just a couple of hours ago, but it had been eroded away by his frustrations. No one had been able to give him a straight answer about what was wrong with Emily and whether she’d be okay. Those who’d give him anything at all only said that they were doing all they could and that they’d have to wait and see. Ryan had had enough waiting, although there didn’t seem to be much else for him to do aside from trying to outrun his dark thoughts.

It took him only a few minutes to lose himself in the confusing maze of corridors. Outpacing his thoughts would take longer than he had, so he was wondering whether he should just go back when he came across a chapel hidden in the space between two minor hallways. He almost walked right past it and headed for the waiting room again, but he didn’t really want to go back yet. That place reeked of worry and fear. Instead, he approached the peaked arch of the entryway. The standard rectangular doors, which opened outward, were topped by a window which filled the rest of the arch. On its frame was written the words “Whoever will may enter here.” Ryan poked his head into the chapel.

A single carpeted aisle on the otherwise bare wooden floor led to the front. To the left, a table and some chairs occupied an alcove set off by stone arches. To the right were rows of wooden seats, padded in light blue. Electric candles and track lighting on the peaked ceiling lit every corner, but there was no one inside. Ryan’s eyes were drawn to the stained glass windows, whose blue and green panes were unnaturally bright for this hour. Given the chapel’s location deep inside the hospital, those windows couldn’t possibly lead to the outside. There were no overt religious symbols, but despite its attempted neutrality, the chapel was obviously designed to bring comfort to those who recognized stained glass windows, an altar, and even an organ, as the proper accoutrements of a place of worship.

Ryan slipped into one of the chairs in the back row. He didn’t usually take solace in the church, but he was glad to have found some place quiet and empty. It did little to soothe his nerves, though, and his queasy stomach refused to settle. Emily might be dying and all he could do was wait. He wanted to walk straight back to the Recovery Room and demand answers, but he was afraid that he would get none. He was even more afraid that he would get answers he didn’t want.

It would have been easier to just rest here for a moment if he had found it as comforting as it was meant to be. It should, for reasons ranging from the windows looking at nothing but lights to the plastic candles with flame-shaped bulbs, feel as fake as it looked, but he couldn’t shake the eerie sense that this place was… sacred. It was the only word that fit. The chapel demanded silence. Even Ryan’s breathing had slowed in response, as if the empty room were, in truth, occupied by Someone he didn’t dare disturb. Ryan snorted. He was too much of a skeptic to be an atheist—he doubted atheism too—but it was hard for him to imagine a God who would stoop to occupying any human building, much less such a lame imitation of a house of worship. On the other hand, he’d learned a little bit about the God Emily believed in. That God relished interacting with His creation. Ryan could imagine Him in this room now, waiting for His presence to be acknowledged.

Once that disturbing thought had taken hold, it wouldn’t go away. After a few minutes, Ryan gave up on trying. “Okay, so you’ve got my attention,” he said aloud. “What do you want?” A terrible idea occurred to him. “Is that why this happened? Is that why I’m unhurt while she’s…”

Ryan gripped the wooden back of the chair in front of him and stared at the central stained glass window, a circular pane with others sprouting from it like petals from a flower. The silence rushed in his ears like the breath of an unseen Presence. “What do you want from me? We’ve been through this before: I don’t have anything for you. Just my doubts and my questions which you don’t see fit to answer. I did what Emily wanted. I went to church, I read the Bible, I even prayed. But I never got any answers, you never showed yourself.” He searched for some hint of God in the flecks of gold and red which marred the blue and green pattern of the window, but he saw only glass.

“I can believe in a Supreme Being, a distant Creator who abandoned us long ago. But a God who cares? Would a God like that let this happen?”

Emily had tried to teach him a lifetime of Sunday School lessons in the months they’d been together, including all the correct answers to the difficult theological questions. Ryan considered the stock answers mere word games compared to the four terse biographies of one man. “I’ve read the gospels, and I believe that Jesus was good. Not meek and mild, as I’d always thought, but bold and honest, moved by righteous anger as well as deep love. Are you like that? How can you be? How could a good and all-powerful God let Jesus suffer and die like that, especially if he’s His own Son?

“Emily thinks you did it for us, but why would you care so much about this world? Why should you bother helping me at all? You didn’t really heal me, did you?” Ryan had been banged up and in shock, and in his confusion he must have believed himself worse off than he was. He glanced down at his now uninjured arm and for the first time noticed the black imprint of tire treads on the beige sleeve of his jacket. For once, his stunned mind could manage no rationalization. Ryan felt as if his chest was being squeezed, and he struggled to find breath. “Okay, maybe… maybe something did happen. But why would you heal me? Emily’s the one who believes. Heal her!”

This wasn’t his first one-way argument with God. He’d never gotten any answers before and he didn’t expect them now, but he wouldn’t be damned for lack of trying. He opened his mouth to continue, but all that came out was a groan. The hard wood of the chair in front of him seemed to give way to his clutching fingers.

“Do you want me to believe too? You’ve convinced me that you exist. Isn’t that good enough? No… you want worship, love, surrender, and I can’t! If I knew for certain that you were the God Emily believes in, then… maybe. I want to see you the way she does, but how can I, when things like this happen? Just, show me that you’re good, then I’ll believe. If you save Emily, I’ll believe.”
Nothing, just silence, but Ryan knew the answer to his bargaining. He had known even before he asked.

“I’m a rotten liar, aren’t I? Of course I wouldn’t believe, not when I could rationalize and make excuses. Why should you accept promises even I don’t trust?”

Ryan swallowed, trying to get his emotions under control. Tears trickled down his cheek, but he didn’t release his death grip on the chair to wipe them away. “If... if I give you the faith you want, will you save her?” He sighed. “You won’t make promises, will you? And I can’t make this conditional. I just have to trust that you’re good, and hope that means you won’t let her die.”

Ryan laid his forehead on his hands, which were cramping up from their grip on the wooden chair. “I give up. How can I fight you when you’re the only hope I have? I don’t know whether you’re as good as Emily says you are, just that there’s nowhere else to go. I need you. I need hope. And if… if I lose her… I need to believe that there’s hope beyond that, for both of us.” He paused to force a couple of deep breaths into his constricted chest. “I’d give up my life for that sort of hope. Take it.”

The tightness in his chest finally eased. The tension of facing a difficult decision, of doing what he had to do even when he didn’t want to, flowed out of Ryan. The simple relief that came with finally making a difficult decision grew into a sense of peace, a certainty that he’d done the right thing. His flesh tingled with goose bumps as Ryan felt the stirrings of awe, drowning his instinctive skepticism.

“Thank you. I… Just, thank you,” he said as he wiped the tears from his eyes. Ryan exhaled a shuddering sigh and realized that he was trembling all over, his teeth literally chattering in the aftermath of the experience. He clamped them shut and lifted his head to look around. He was alone in the tiny chapel. No one had seen his spiritual struggle, or heard the loud parts. It was between him, God, and the glowing stained glass windows. He was exhausted, and would have gladly closed his eyes to rest, but the peace and certainty were already fading, replaced by a rising edginess. Emily…

Ryan leveraged himself to his feet with his cramped hands. He needed to go and find out what had happened to her. He could hope that, since he’d given God what He wanted, He’d let Emily be okay. Only… that didn’t sound like the God Emily--and now Ryan--believed in. Would He hold a loved one hostage get what He wanted? But how could He still let her die? Ryan didn’t have the answers, but maybe he could find them. His trembling limbs carried him out the door and into the corridor.



Emily lay on a sterile, railed bed in the ICU. An IV drip was attached to her arm, a mask over her face forced air into her lungs, and a heart monitor beeped a regular but slow rhythm. Ryan took a seat in the chair next to her. In the glow of the bright fluorescents, Emily’s face was pale beneath the freckles, and her blond hair lay in limp curls around her head. Even asleep, her face was scrunched up as if in pain. Ryan reached out a hand, but pulled it back, afraid to touch her fragile body.

“I wanted to tell you, Emily. I wanted you to know that… that I’ve decided to trust God.” He hesitated, wondering if he really did. “I want to believe like you do, but it’s hard when I see you here like this.” Ryan fell silent, still staring at her unmoving form. “I can’t complain that I’ve never seen a miracle. I was crushed, and now… Something happened there, and I think it happened because you asked for it. I remember hearing your prayers. What I don’t understand is why He would just leave you like this. He can’t, can He?”

The doctor’s news had not been good. She was suffering from something called tension pneumothorax, an influx of air into her chest cavity which had collapsed her lung and put pressure on her other organs. Because of the resulting lack of oxygen, she had slipped into a coma, and it was possible that she would never wake up. He looked away from the painful sight, turning his eyes towards the ceiling instead. “Can you? Why won’t you do something about this? I didn’t deserve the miracle you’ve already given me, so I don’t dare ask for another one. But I didn’t ask for that one! I don’t want it. Take it back, and give it to Emily. Heal her instead.”

Ryan waited, listening to Emily’s regulated breathing and the steady pulse of her heartbeat monitor. His own breathing was still. Idiot! Did you really think her eyes would open and she’d smile and it would all be better? A wracking pain suddenly twisted his middle and he tried to reach for it, but his left arm flashed with agony when he moved it. He let that arm dangle from his shoulder and instead touched his side with his right hand. The thin shirt the hospital had given him felt warm and damp, and when he brought his fingers back, they were sticky with blood. What the--?

“Ryan?” a muffled voice croaked in front of him, and he looked to see Emily watching him. Her eyes were open and clear, but filled with confusion and fear.

Ryan smiled as he slumped forward, reaching out to take Emily’s hand in his bloody one. His cheek came to rest on the cold metal bar on the side of her bed. He coughed, and spots of red flecked the silvery surface. “Thank God…,” he whispered. “Thank God you’re all right.” Fear was quickly overtaking his joy at her recovery. “But I think you should call a doctor, ’cause I’m not.” As brightly lit as the room was, it was growing dark.


This is a 2,967 word short story.

It is a Ryan and Emily story, but I'm not sure it's the same Ryan and Emily as in Eyes in the Shadow. As it needed to be a stand-alone story, I had to avoid mentioning their history, and treat them as if those things hadn't happened--or at least, had not really affected them in any way worth mentioning. And as it needed to be short, less than three thousand words, I had to quickly introduce the characters--well, introduce Ryan and tell a little bit about Emily second-hand--and bring him to a crisis of faith and a resolution in time for the denouement. In retrospect, it reads a lot like a compressed version of Eyes. The argument it centers around is very similar to Chapter 9 of Eyes, and the ending of the story has a lot in common with the climax of Eyes in Chapter 15, although in this case it's a cliff-hanger, since I didn't have time to explain what had happened. A lot of people I showed this story to were confused about that, and wouldn't believe me when I told them that a straightforward reading was the most accurate. The similarity of the story without invoking the history hurts this story a lot for someone who's read Eyes. Eyes in the Shadow is due a rewrite in any case, and I think once that is done, I'll turn my attention to reworking this story into something that better fits the lives of Ryan and Emily.

Thursday, November 3, 2005

Family Life, Chapter 10 of Fire
The Rest of the Story: The whole of Fire can be found on my Writings page in PDF format, while the portion of the story that's been published on this blog so far is on this page.

Unlike Eyes in the Shadow, which I made up as I went along without even the vaguest of ideas of where things would end up, I had a pretty good idea what would be happening in Fire. On second thought, that's not completely true. It had already deviated off-course due to Chapter 2, which gave me time to revisit Lucia and discover some interesting things about her in Chapter 3. Then I checked in with the Domini in Chapter 4 and was surprised by the plot which Kulsin had in motion. And I had to follow up on the war I'd started in Chapter 2 with Chapter 5 and figure out how things would play out. So, okay, I didn't really know where things were going until after I'd written those first five chapters. After that, however, the basic plot of the rest of Fire became clear to me, and I began to see how the two main plotlines, the plotting among the Domini and the war started by the Orcs, would play out. So while I didn't know the details of what would happen, or which Point-of-View I'd want to tell it from, I knew what had to happen. I had the events in this chapter in mind shortly after I'd written Chapter 4. Of course, back then, I was writing at such a slow pace, maybe a Chapter every few months, that I had plenty of time to think about Fire when I wasn't writing it, so I had plenty of opportunity to sort the plot out. The sequel does not have quite the same stately pace, as I spent four months last year writing away at a devilish pace, barely pausing long enough to breathe, let alone think through what was going to happen before I wrote. The latter part of it is more thought out. Anyway, here's the next chapter of Fire.


Chapter 10
Family Life

Lucia reclined on one elbow and tried to ignore the pain around her. Marcus Principius and Avla Principia lay at opposite ends of the table, as far from each other as they could get in the small, private dining room, their eyes carefully avoiding one another. Though they both wore a civil facade, they fooled neither Lucia nor Aulus. Hurt and anger seeped from her mother, her father exuded stubbornness and pride. Her brother watched them both, tense and curious. Lucia knew some of why they acted this way. Avla had never recovered from Victor’s loss, nor had she forgiven her husband’s acceptance, and although time had blunted her grief, it had only sharpened her bitterness. Marcus Principius believed he had done the right thing, for the Empire and for his family, and he would continue to do so no matter how much it hurt him. Aulus’s familial concern warred with his insatiable hunger to know more, but Lucia knew that he would never settle for ignorance. If he could root out all the secrets without hurting his family, he would. If it turned out that he couldn’t, he would not stop digging.

Lucia couldn’t tell how much of what she knew came from an unnatural source, and how much came from simply knowing her family. Sometimes she could not tell the two apart. Aulus watched her now, that familiar tension running through him, reminding Lucia that she did not know how much he had discovered about her. He guarded his thoughts and feelings as much as his words around her, and sometimes her sense of him just disappeared. He had always been good at fading into the background, and now his mind could go as quiet as his body.

“I’ll be leaving for Artura by the end of the month,” Aulus said, breaking the uncomfortable silence with even more uncomfortable words.

“I thought you had decided to stay here another year,” Avla said.

“Things change,” Marcus Principius replied before Aulus could. The gaze he fixed on his son looked more distant than stern. “I once thought he would...” He stopped before his words became hurtful, suppressing disappointment and regret as he reached for his wine.

Avla did not let those words slip by, however. “Let the boy live his own life, will you? At least he’s still here to live it.”

“I’m not a boy,” Aulus said mildly. He had spoken the expected words while making no real effort to distract their bickering.

“Do you know what Marjori taught about today?” Lucia said quickly. She rolled onto her stomach, still propped up on her elbow, and folded her legs above her with her ankles crossed. Marcus Principius gladly let his daughter change the subject, and Avla said nothing although her challenge went unanswered. Aulus, although annoyed to see a very interesting exchange dry up, also kept his mouth closed.

With the sudden quiet came the pressure to fill the silence. Fortunately, Lucia was rarely at a loss for words, even if she now wished she had paid better attention to her tutor. “Marjori was telling me about the wars with the Orcs. I didn’t think she even believed in Orcs, but she said she had read reliable records dating back to that time. I think she only believes them because Philosophers wrote them.”

“Philosophers are as liable to bias as anyone else,” Aulus said, picking at his roast pheasant. Soon the slaves would come to clear away the food, doing their best to pretend they didn’t hear the arguing. “I’ve read a few of their records. It’s amazing how much they simply choose not to believe because it doesn’t fit into their view of things.”

“I hope Marjori isn’t teaching that sort of prejudice to Lucia,” Avla said.

“Marjori is an excellent tutor,” Marcus Principius said. “While I may not agree with her Philosophy, I think a bit of skepticism is healthy.”

“You won’t hear me argue against skepticism, Father,” Aulus replied. “I’m the last one to believe something just because somebody tells me.” Indeed, the more people who told Aulus something, the less he believed it. “What bothers me is that they decide that some things cannot be true before they even look into them. Like the gods, or magic. I’d expect people to be hesitant to trust in such things, but how could you know that they don’t exist? How do you prove something like that?”

“Is Marjori really teaching you that there are no gods, Lucia?” Avla asked.

“Dear, Marjori taught all four of our sons before Lucia,” Marcus said. “Do you think she’s teaching her anything she didn’t teach them? Why are you concerned now?”

“Are you saying I didn’t care about our sons’ education? Of course I cared, but it was your responsibility to raise them properly.” Lucia didn’t need the sudden flood of emotion to know that more than education filled her mother’s thoughts. “Your responsibility,” Avla whispered, closing her eyes. The words were not quite low enough to be missed by Marcus Principius. The anger and guilt Lucia could sense in him should have made him flinch, but instead he managed to pretend he didn’t hear. “Lucia is mine,” she finished more loudly.

“Marjori didn’t say anything about the gods, Mom,” Lucia said. She glared at Aulus, who shrugged. “She talked about Orcs. She said they looked a lot like humans, but with green skin and long ears. They’re stronger than us, but not as smart. And they hate us more than anything in the world.”

“I wouldn’t worry about the Orcs, Lucia,” Avla said. “No one has seen them in over two hundred years. That’s a very long time--why would they come back now?”

“Two hundred years is not that long,” said Lucia’s father. “Don’t just assume they’re gone because they haven’t been seen in a while.”

“How long ago that was depends on whom you ask,” Aulus said, swirling his wine cup in one hand. “Philosophers take a longer view of things than we do, but we take a much longer view than... the Kairnin, for example. To them, even a single generation is...” He trailed off as if the rest were self-evident.

“And what of the Orcs?” Lucia asked. “What sort of view do they take?” It bothered her that she couldn’t tell what Aulus was thinking, but she would make use of his involvement if she thought one of his lectures might distract her parents.

“I don’t know,” Aulus said, perversely refusing to play along. “I suspect it’s on the short side.”

“As I was saying, Lucia,” her mother continued with a challenging look at her husband. “That was a very long time ago. You shouldn’t worry about it.”

Throughout the entire exchange, emotions s